Professional Documents
Culture Documents
EPSON WF-C869Ra
WF-C869R
CONFIDENTIAL
SEMF16-004
Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being
informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Confidential
Safety Precautions
All safety procedures described here shall be strictly adhered to by all parties servicing and maintaining this product.
DANGER
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply could result in serious bodily injury or loss of life.
1. Always disconnect the product from the power source and peripheral devices when servicing the product or performing maintenance.
2. When performing works described in this manual, do not connect to a power source until instructed to do so. Connecting to a power source causes high voltage
in the power supply unit and some electronic components even if the product power switch is off. If you need to perform the work with the power cable
connected to a power source, use extreme caution to avoid electrical shock.
WARNING
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or loss of life.
1. Always wear protective goggles for disassembly and reassembly to protect your eyes from ink in working. If any ink gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with
clean water and consult a doctor immediately.
2. When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is
prohibited.
PRECAUTIONS
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or damage of the product.
1. Repairs on Epson product should be performed only by an Epson certified repair technician.
2. No work should be performed on this product by persons unfamiliar with basic safety knowledge required for electrician.
3. The power rating of this product is indicated on the serial number/rating plate. Never connect this product to the power source whose voltages is different from
the rated voltage.
4. Replace malfunctioning components only with those components provided or approved by Epson; introduction of second-source ICs or other non-approved
components may damage the product and void any applicable Epson warranty.
Confidential
5. In order to protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when accessing internal components.
6. Do not tilt this product immediately after initial ink charge, especially after performing the ink charge several times. Doing so may cause ink to leak from the
product because it may take some time for the waste ink pads to completely absorb ink wasted due to the ink charge.
7. Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water immediately. If you have a skin
irritation, consult a doctor immediately.
8. When disassembling or assembling this product, make sure to wear gloves to avoid injuries from metal parts with sharp edges.
9. Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or adjusting the printer.
10. Observe the specified torque when tightening screws.
11. Be extremely careful not to scratch or contaminate the following parts.
Nozzle plate of the print head
Gears
Rollers
LCD
Scanner Sensor
Exterior parts
12. Never use oil or grease other than those specified in this manual. Use of different types of oil or grease may damage the component or give bad influence on the
printer function.
13. Apply the specified amount of grease described in this manual.
14. Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the printer.
15. When cleaning this product, follow the procedure described in this manual.
16. When transporting the product with ink filled in the print head, take precautionary measure against ink leak before packing the product.
17. Make sure to install antivirus software in the computers used for the service support activities.
18. Keep the virus pattern file of antivirus software up-to-date.
Confidential
About This Manual
This manual, consists of the following chapters, is intended for repair service personnel and includes information necessary for properly performing maintenance
and servicing the product.
CHAPTER 3. STRUCTURE
Explains about components and operating principles of the product.
CHAPTER 4. INSTALLATION
Describes how to install and set up the product.
CHAPTER 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
Provides information for identifying causes of errors/problems from the symptoms or events, and the procedure for troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 8. MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Provides cautions, points to be checked and procedure for maintaining and inspecting the product.
CHAPTER 9. APPENDIX
Provides additional information for reference.
Confidential
Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
equipment.
C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information
P O IN T that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components in
question may be adversely affected.
A D J U S T M E N T Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
R E Q U IR E D
Confidential
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A February 28, 2017 First release
Revise the content
Chapter 1
Made change the table of "2.1 Product Hardware Specifications" (p.14).
Scan speed information is added to "2.4 ADF Specifications" (p.19).
Scan speed information i added to "2.5 Scanner Specifications" (p.20).
Authentication device stand is added to "2.6 Options Specifications" (p.20).
Speed dial information is added to "2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications" (p.21).
Made change the description of Group dial in "2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications" (p.21).
Chapter 3
Sensor type of ink cartridge sensor and maintenance box sensor are added to "3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink Detection and Cover Detection
System Sensors)" (p.30).
Sensor type of CIS module is added to "3.2.8 Scanner (Motors and Sensors)" (p.36).
Sensor type of CIS module is added to "3.2.9 ADF (Motors and Sensors)" (p.37).
Made change the figure of "3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism" (p.39).
Made change the figure of "3.3.2.1 PW Sensor Shutter Mechanism" (p.40).
Made change the figure of "3.3.3 Ink Supply Mechanism" (p.41).
B March 31, 2017 Made change the description and figure of "3.3.3.1 Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principles" (p.42).
Made change the description and figure of "3.3.3.2 Ink Pack Unit" (p.43).
Made change the description and figure of "3.3.4 Ink System Mechanism" (p.44).
Made change the figure of pump mechanism in 3.3.4.2 Drive path (p.46).
Description of CR lock lever mechanism is added in 3.3.4.3 Operation of Each Mechanism (p.48).
Made change the description and figure of "3.3.5 Paper Loading/Paper Feed" (p.49).
Made change the description and figure of "3.3.5.3 Rear Feed" (p.51),(p.52)
Made change the figure of 3.3.5.4 Drive path(p.54).
Made change the description and figure of "3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism" (p.62).
Made change the description of 3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism(p.63).
Ink system Assy is added to table of Periodic replacement parts in "3.4 Life Management" (p.64).
Description of Periodic Maintenance is added to "3.4 Life Management" (p.64).
Chapter 4
Caution is added to "4.1 Introduction and Installation" (p.67).
made change the figure of "4.1 Introduction and Installation" (p.67).
"4.1.3.2 Firmware update" (p.73) is added.
"4.1.3.4 Ink information display setting" (p.78) is added.
Confidential
Revision Date of Issue Description
Chapter 5
Made change the description of "5.1.2 Service mode startup and operating procedures" (p.83).
Link of USB Firmware is added to table of "5.1.3 Service mode menu configuration" (p.85).
Chapter 6
" Paper jam error" (p.111) is added.
Detail of Fatal error is added to "6.2.2 Fatal Errors" (p.115).
B March 31, 2017
Chapter 7
"7.1.1 Caution of repair the product" (p.245) is added.
Made change the description of PG adjustment procedure(p.275).
Made change the description (all content) of "7.4.3 REPAIR WORK Details" (p.372).
Chapter 8
"8.3 USB F/W Update" (p.767) is added.
Chapter 7
Made change the "7.1.3 Disassembly/Reassembly Flowchart" (p.246).
Chapter 9
Made change the "9.1 Connection Diagram" (p.771).
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
Contents
Chapter 1 Product Outline 3.3.4 Ink System Mechanism ............................................................................. 44
3.3.5 Paper Loading/Paper Feed ......................................................................... 49
1.1 Product Summary ............................................................................................... 12 3.3.6 Scanner/ADF Mechanism .......................................................................... 61
3.4 Life Management .............................................................................................. 64
Chapter 2 Product Specifications
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications ...................................................................... 14 Chapter 4 Installation
2.2 Printing Specifications ....................................................................................... 18 4.1 Introduction and Installation ............................................................................. 67
2.3 Copying Specifications ...................................................................................... 18 4.1.1 Overview of Introduction and Installation ............................................... 67
2.4 ADF Specifications ........................................................................................... 19 4.1.2 Checks Before Introduction and Installation ............................................ 68
4.1.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 69
2.5 Scanner Specifications ....................................................................................... 20
2.6 Options Specifications ....................................................................................... 20 Chapter 5 Service Support Mode
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications ....................................................... 21
5.1 Service Support Mode ........................................................................................ 83
Chapter 3 Configuration 5.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 83
5.1.2 Service mode startup and operating procedures ........................................ 83
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) ..................................................... 23 5.1.3 Service mode menu configuration ............................................................. 85
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications ......................................... 28 5.1.4 Service Support Menu Screen Transition .................................................. 86
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors) ...................................................................... 29
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink Detection and Cover Detection System Sensors) 30 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids) .................... 31 6.1 Troubleshooting Workflow ............................................................................... 88
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit (Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Sole-
noids) ......................................................................................................... 32 6.2 Error Display and Solution ................................................................................ 90
3.2.5 Printer Main Unit (Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids) 6.2.1 Indications, Causes, and Solutions when Normal Errors Occur ............... 90
33 6.2.2 Fatal Errors ............................................................................................. 115
3.2.6 Options (Motors) ...................................................................................... 34 6.2.3 Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom ................................................ 153
3.2.7 Options (Sensors) ...................................................................................... 35 6.3 Individual Action Check Function .................................................................. 188
3.2.8 Scanner (Motors and Sensors) .................................................................. 36 6.4 Fax Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 199
3.2.9 ADF (Motors and Sensors) ....................................................................... 37 6.4.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting ...................................................... 199
3.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES .............................................................................. 38 6.4.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX .................................................................. 199
3.3.1 Print Head .................................................................................................. 38 6.4.3 FAX Error Code ..................................................................................... 216
3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism .................................................................................. 39 6.4.4 FAX Service Parameter .......................................................................... 219
3.3.3 Ink Supply Mechanism .............................................................................. 41 6.4.5 Fax related user special parameters. ....................................................... 235
6.4.6 Fax related troubleshooting .................................................................... 238
9
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
Chapter 8 Maintenance/Inspection
8.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 764
8.2 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 764
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions ......................................................... 765
8.3 USB F/W Update .............................................................................................. 767
Chapter 9 Appendix
9.1 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 771
9.2 Part Names Conversion Table .......................................................................... 772
9.3 Status Sheet Information .................................................................................. 778
10
Confidential
CHAPTERZ
1
PRODUCT OUTLINE
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
Item Specification
Paper cassette (C1) 250 sheets
Paper cassette (C2) 550 sheets
Paper loading capacity Paper cassette (C3) 550 sheets
Paper cassette (C4) 550 sheets
Rear paper feed tray (Rear ASF Unit) 85 sheets
Plain paper (0.11 mm thickness, 80 g/m2 paper) Default 250 sheets
Plain paper (0.11 mm thickness, 80 g/m2 paper) Default 250 sheets
Output tray capacity
Photo paper (A4/Letter/8”x10”/5”x7”) 20 sheets
Postcard 20 sheets
BK different by each country
C different by each country
Replacement Ink Packs
M different by each country
Y different by each country
Replacement Maintenance Box different by each country
Product lifetime 600,000 sheets
Paper handling
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Plain paper A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Postcard Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---
Bright White Ink Jet Paper A3, A4 92.5 g/m2
Preprinted A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Cassette Letterhead A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(C1) Recycled A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Color A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Business plain paper A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
Thick paper 1 A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 91 to 150 g/m2
Thick paper 2 A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 151 to 200 g/m2
Plain paper A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Bright White Ink Jet Paper A3, A4 92.5 g/m2
Preprinted A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Letterhead A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Cassette
Recycled A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(C2 to C4)
Color A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Business plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
Thick paper 1 A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 91 to 150 g/m2
Thick paper 2 A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 151 to 200 g/m2
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Plain paper A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Postcard Reply-paid card, Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---
NAGAGATA No.3/No.4/No.40, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, C6 75 to 90 g/m2
Envelopes YOGATA No.1/No.2/No.3/No.4 75 to 100 g/m2
KAKUGATA No.2/No.20, C4 80 to 100 g/m2
Bright White Ink Jet Paper A3, A4 92.5 g/m2
Photo Quality Self Post Card Postcard 175 g/m2
Photo Quality Self Adhesive Sheets A4 167 g/m2
Premium Glossy Photo Paper A3+/Super A3/B, A3, 11 x 17 in., 11 x 14 in., Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 16:9 wide, 4 x 6 in. 255 g/m2
Rear paper Premium Semigloss Photo Paper A3+/Super A3/B, A3, Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 250 g/m2
feed tray Matte Paper A3+/Super A3/B, A3, 11 x 14 in., Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in. 167 g/m2
(Rear ASF
Archival Matte Paper A3+/Super A3/B, A3, A4 189 g/m2
Unit)
Double-Sided Matte Paper Letter, A4 176 g/m2
Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper /
A3+/Super A3/B, A3, Letter, A4, 102 g/m2
Presentation Paper Matte
Ultra Glossy Photo Paper /
A3+/Super A3/B, A3+, A3, Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 300 g/m2
Ultra Glossy Photo Paper
Brochure & Flyer Paper Glossy Letter
Photo Paper Glossy A3+/Super A3/B, A3, 11 x 17 in., Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 200 g/m2
Preprinted A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Letterhead A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Recycled A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Color A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 gm2
Rear paper Business plain paper A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
feed tray
Thick paper 1 A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 91 to 150 g/m2
(Rear ASF
Unit) Thick paper 2 A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 151 to 200 g/m2
Thick paper 3 A3, US B /11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, 16K, 8K, User-defined sizes 201 to 256 g/m2
3
CONFIGURATION
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) Table 3-1. Name of Each Part
No. Name Description
ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
1 Open to remove a document jammed in the ADF.
Cover (F)
Guides for feeding the document straight. Align
2 ADF Paper Guides
them to the sides of the document.
3 ADF Input Tray (F) Feeds the document automatically.
4 ADF Output Tray Holds the document delivered from the ADF.
5 Ink Cases (P1, P2) Load the ink packs.
Paper Cassette (C1),
6 Load the print paper.
Paper Cassette (C2)
Paper Cassette (C3), These are optional additional cassette units. Load
7
Paper Cassette (C4) the print paper.
This is an optional cabinet. Print paper,
8 Cabinet
consumables, and other items can be stored in it.
Lift Motor
(Paper Cassette (C1)) Lift Motor
(Paper Cassette (C2))
ASF Motor
(Rear ASF / Paper ASF Motor
Cassette (C1)) (Paper Cassette (C2))
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink Detection and Cover Detection System Sensors)
Table 3-7. Ink Supply and Exterior System Sensors
Ink Cartridge Sensor
Name Function Type Ink End Sensor
(black)
Ink Cartridge Sensor Used for ink pack recognition. CSIC
Maintenance Box Sensor Used for maintenance box recognition. CSIC Ink Supply Open/
Closed Sensor (left)
Photo interrupter Ink Supply Open/
Ink End Sensor Detects the end of the ink. Closed Sensor
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
(right)
Mechanical
Detects the open/closed state of the rear
Rear Cover Open Sensor contact
cover.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Mechanical
Front Cover Open/Closed Detects the open/closed state of the front
contact
Sensor cover.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Mechanical
Ink Supply Open/Closed Checks the open/closed state of the ink
contact
Sensor supply cover.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Front Cover
Open/Closed Sensor
Maintenance Box
Sensor Ink Cartridge Sensors
Rear Cover Open Sensor (magenta/cyan)
Photo interrupter
APG Drive Sensor Used for detecting the APG phase.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Used for the PW shutter open/close
PW Solenoid ---
operation.
PW Solenoid PW Sensor
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit (Paper Feed and Conveyance Hopper Up/down Duplex Print Assy
System Sensors and Solenoids) Sensor Paper Detection Sensor
Table 3-9. Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Solenoids
Name Function Type
ASF Encoder
Used for paper feed driving (PF motor) Photo interrupter
PF Encoder (Rear ASF /
control. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Paper Cassette (C1))
Photo interrupter
ASF Encoder Used for ASF motor operation control. Rear ASF
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Solenoid
Used for paper conveyance detection Photo interrupter
Feed Sensor
between the pickup roller and PE sensor. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Figure 3-9. Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Solenoids
Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 32
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
3.2.5 Printer Main Unit (Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids)
Table 3-10. Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids
Name Function Type
Intermediate
Detects whether or not there is paper Photo interrupter
Paper Detection Sensor Release Solenoid
inside the paper cassette. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Cassette Paper
Paper Detection Sensor Detects whether or not there is paper Photo interrupter Size Sensor (1) Intermediate Nip Paper Detection
(Rear ASF Unit) inside the rear ASF unit. (3.3 VDC ±5%) (Paper Cassette (C1)) Release Sensor Sensor(Rear ASF Unit)
Figure 3-10. Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids
ASF Motor
(Optional Cassette)
Feed Sensor
Used for paper conveyance detection Photo interrupter Cassette Paper
from the pickup roller. (3.3 VDC ±5%) Size Sensor (2)
Mechanical Cassette
Detects the insertion state of the paper Detection Sensor Jam Processing
Cassette Detection Sensor contact Cover Sensor
cassette.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Mechanical
Jam Processing Cover Detects the open/closed state of the rear
contact
Sensor cover.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
Detects the size of the paper loaded in the Mechanical
Cassette Paper Size
paper cassette. (Paper length is contact
Sensor (1)
determined from the end guide position.) (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Cassette Paper Size Detects the size of the paper loaded in the Photo interrupter
Sensor (2) paper cassette. (Paper width detection) (3.3 VDC ±5%)
ASF Encoder
Cassette Paper Size
Sensor (1)
SCN Document
Size Sensor
ADF Closed Sensor
ADF PE Sensor A
Detects whether or not there is a Photo interrupter ADF Pickup Motor
document in the paper feed path. (3.3 VDC ±5%) ADF Document
Detects whether or not there is a Photo interrupter Size Sensors
ADF PE Sensor B
document in the paper feed path. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Detects whether or not there is a Photo interrupter
ADF PE Sensor C
document in the paper feed path. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Detects whether or not a document is Photo interrupter
ADF Document Sensor
placed on the ADF document support. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
ADF Document Size Detects the size of the document placed Photo interrupter
Sensors on the ADF document support. (3.3 VDC ±5%)
Mechanical
ADF Cover Open/Closed Detects the open/closed state of the ADF
contact
Sensor cover.
(3.3 VDC ±5%)
ADF Pickup Encoder
CIS Module
3.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES The nozzle arrangement of the mTFP4 head mounted on this printer differs
from that of the traditional printers. The nozzles of the same color are not
arranged next to each other.
3.3.1 Print Head
The nozzle layout as seen from behind the Print Head is shown below.
WF-C869R/WF-C869Ra feature the brand new Print Head: mTFP4 head.
The mTFP4 head features dense nozzle pitches (600 dpi); denser than the
traditional heads. In addition, the number of nozzles per row is also greater
Row B Row D Row F Row H
with the row length of 1.33 inches. (Cyan) (Bk) (Magenta) (Yellow)
Row A Row C Row E Row G
These features contribute to higher image quality and faster printing by (Yellow) (Magenta) (Bk) (Cyan)
increasing both the quantity and the density of ink droplets per shot. The
1. This valve opens only when the pressure of the output side drops below a specified value. Because of this character-
Figure 3-15. Print Head Appearance istic of the valve, pressure variation in the input side does not affect the output side.
CR Motor
CR Unit
Operating Principles
The PW sensor shutter mechanism is opened and closed by the Knock Cam
mechanism1 . The Shutter Lever of the CR Solenoid Assy pushes the Knock
where the PW Sensor
Shaft, and the PW Sensor Shutter at the end of the shaft slides open Lever functions
accordingly. The PW Sensor Shutter slides shut in the reverse process.
The CR Solenoid Assy controls the operation of the Shutter Lever by
electrifying the solenoid2 . The relationship of the electrifying status of the
Solenoid and the sticking-out/retracted status of the Shutter Lever is as follow.
Bottom of CR Unit
By moving the CR Unit to the end of the left side of the printer (where the PW
Sensor Lever functions) with the Shutter Lever sticking out, the PW Sensor PW Sensor Shutter CLOSED PW Sensor Shutter OPEN
Shutter is opened or closed. PW Sensor Shutter
When printing normally, the Solenoid is not electrified, so if the CR Unit to the
end of the Left side of printer (where the PW Sensor Lever functions), the PW
Sensor Shutter does not operate at all.
Only when the PW Sensor detects paper, the PW Sensor Shutter is opened.
Soon after the PW Sensor detects the paper, the PW Sensor Shutter is closed.
Knock Shaft Rotor PW Sensor
1. This mechanism is composed of the Knock Shaft, Rotor, and the Knock Cam. It is used mainly for the knock shift
mechanism of knock type ball point pens. In this case, the CR Unit plays a role of the Knock Cam.
2. Equipped with a pull type Solenoid in which the magnetic body id pulled by the electromagnetic force. Figure 3-18. PW sensor shutter mechanism
Ink Tube
Magnet Holder
Ink Cartridge Holder
Print Head
(with self-sealing valve)
ink cartridges and they are installed into the Ink Pack Unit on both right and
left sides of the printer.
The Ink Pack Units on both sides are connected by the ink tubes with the Ink
Cartridge Holder, and supply ink in the packs to the Ink Cartridge Holder.
The amount of remaining ink is monitored by the Ink End Sensors and the ink
consumption counter of the firmware. The Ink End Sensors are mounted inside
the ink packs and the Ink Cartridge Holder.
Therefore, if the ink tube between the Ink Pack Unit and Ink Cartridge Holder
is blocked, the error (ink end) occurs.
Additionally, WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R mounts the tube relay connector to the
Ink tube (YMC).
As a result, Ink tube can be separated to printer side and ink pack unit side, and
Ink Tube (Bk)
the ink tank can be removed without releasing the tube routings.
Additionally, valve is mounted to the connector part of ink cartridge holder, Ink Tube (YMC) Tube Relay Connector
and valve is closed when removing the ink tube from ink cartridge
holder.Therefore, ink spilling can be prevented when removing the ink tube
from ink cartridge holder.
1. The Maintenance Box has a CSIC to store the counter value. Therefore, the actual amount of waste ink is kept mon-
itored by the counter if the Maintenance Box is removed before the time for replacement.
3.3.4.2 Drive Path Since the protrusion on the Cap Slider1 is engaged with the hole on the
The wiper mechanism, carriage lock mechanism, pump mechanism, and ink Intermittent Gear normally, the Intermittent Gear is fixed and the PF Motor's
system mechanism is driven by the PF Motor's drive force. The drive path is as drive force is not transmitted to the wiper mechanism or carriage lock
follows. mechanism.
Wiper Mechanism/Carriage Lock Mechanism If the position of the Cap Slider is changed for capping or the like, the
protrusion on the Cap Slider is disengaged from the hole on the Intermittent
The PF Motor's drive force is transmitted from the IS Driven Gear on the end Gear. Therefore, the Intermittent Gear rotates together with the IS Clutch Gear.
of the PF Roller to the IS Spur Gear/IS Compound Gear/IS Clutch Gear/CR In this state, the PF Motor's drive force is transmitted up to the wiper
Lock Gear/CR Lock Cam via the ES Gear, and drives the wiper mechanism mechanism and carriage lock mechanism.
and the carriage lock mechanism. The transmission of the PF Motor's drive
force to the wiper mechanism and carriage lock mechanism is controlled by the Intermittent Gear secured Intermittent Gear of IS Clutch Gear
cap mechanism and the IS Clutch Gear.
Hole
Table 3-18. Wiper/Carriage Lock mechanisms by PF Motor's rotational direction
PF Motor's rotational direction Clock Counter
wise clock
wise
IS Clutch Gear/ Down Up
Wiper mechanism
Intermittent Gear
Carriage lock mechanism CR Lock Cam Down Set Down Cap Slider Protrusion
The protrusion on the Cap Slider engages
Sideview of Cap Unit IS Clutch Gear/Intermittent Gear Intermittent Gear released with the hole on the Intermittent Gear, and
the Intermittent Gear is fixed.
IS Driven Gear
ES Gear
Figure 3-23. Drive path of the wiper mechanism and carriage lock mechanism 1. The operation of the Cap Slider is carried out by the cap mechanism. For the details, see Capping Mechanism (p. 46).
IS Driven Gear
Cap Slider
ES Compound Gear
Cap
Cap Unit
Wiper Holder
CR Lock Cam
When Wiper is up
Carriage locked
Rotates flattening
the tube
CR Lock Lever
Spring Holder
Rotates without
flattening the tube
Pump Frame
Pump Shaft
Pump Frame
Pump Driven Gear
Pump Shaft
Timing Plate
Figure 3-29. CR lock lever mechanism
Figure 3-30. Scanner mechanism
The ASF Motor drives the Pick-up Roller and feeds the paper to the Separation
Roller. The paper (the top sheet) fed to the Separation Roller is separated by the LD Roller
Separation Roller and Retard Roller from the second sheet and passes the paper Duplex Print Assy
detection point of the Rear PE Sensor, and to the Intermediate Roller. Paper Detection Sensor
Intermediate
The paper fed to the first Intermediate Roller is fed by the two Intermediate Roller
Print Head
Rollers up to the paper detection position of the PE Sensor.
EJ Roller PF Roller
When the PE Sensor detects the paper, skew correction1 is carried out
according to printing conditions. After skew correction, the paper is fed by the PE Sensor
PF Roller up to the print start position and printing starts. After printing is
complete, the paper is ejected by the PF Roller and EJ Roller.
Feed Sensor
Separation Roller
Pick-up Roller
Retard Roller
1. See Paper Feed Mechanism (p. 58) for the details. 2. See Rear Feeding Mechanism (p. 56) for the details.
Feeding From The Optional Cassette Intermediate Roller. The paper fed to the Intermediate Roller is fed by the
Intermediate Roller (Duplex Unit) just before the paper detection point of the
The drive force of the 2nd Lift-up Motor is transmitted to the 2nd Lift-up shaft,
PE Sensor and reversed.
and the 2nd Lift-up shaft raises the 2nd Cassette Hopper. The paper set in the
2nd Cassette Assy is also raised together by the 2nd Cassette Hopper and After feeding the paper just before the paper detection point of the PE Sensor
comes in contact with the 2nd Pick-up Roller. and reversing it, the 2nd drying is carried out. After the drying is complete, the
paper is fed by the Intermediate Roller up to the paper detection point of the PE
The 2nd ASF Motor drives the 2nd Pick-up Roller and the Separation Roller
Sensor and printing is made in the same way as the front face printing.
feed the paper to the 2nd Intermediate Roller. The paper (the top sheet) fed to
the 2nd Intermediate Roller is fed up to the paper detection point of the Rear
PE Sensor. Duplex Print Assy
Paper Detection Sensor Intermediate
When the Rear PE Sensor detects the paper, the ASF Motor starts driving and Roller
the Intermediate Roller feeds the paper up to the paper detection point of the Print Head
PE Sensor and printing is made in the same way as feeding from the Front EJ Roller PF Roller
Cassette.
PE Sensor
Automatic Duplex Printing
AUTOMATIC DRYINGPORTED PN
WF-C869R/WF-C869Ra's automatic duplex printing features the auto drying Feed Sensor
time detection so as to prevent the wet printed face from rubbing with
something. If the printer judges the printed front face must be dried after the
front face printing, a two-step drying is carried out on the Stacker and inside
the Duplex Unit1 .
WF-C869R/WF-C869Ra sets the optimum drying time according to the usage 2nd Separation Roller
environment by Temperature and Humidity sensor.
As a result, improving the throughput.
2nd Pick-up
Roller
BACK FACE PRINTING DURING THE AUTOMATIC DUPLEX PRINTING
If the printer judges the printed front face must be dried during the automatic
duplex printing, the first drying is carried out on the Stacker after the front face 2nd Intermediate Roller
printing. Then, the paper is pulled back into the printer and fed to the Automatic duplex printing feeding path
Feeding path from the Optional Cassette
1. The printer stops operation and waits until the specified drying time has passed.
Figure 3-34. Paper Loading/Feed path (2)
This mechanism raises the paper set on the Cassette Assy up to the paper pick-
up position of the pick-up mechanism. Cassette Hopper
Lift-up mechanism operates the drive force of the Lift-up Motor. The Lift-up
Motor's drive force is transmitted via the Compound Gear A, and to the Lift
One Way
Gear Group on the Cassette Assy, and rotates the Lift-up shaft. Clutch
Table 3-20. Lift-up Motor's rotational directions and operation of the Lift-up shaft Compound
Gear A
Lift-up Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
Operation of the Lift-up shaft Rises Not rotates
On the shaft of the Compound Gear A, the One Way Clutch is mounted. When
the Lift-up Motor rotates CCW, the drive force is cut off by the One Way
Clutch, so the Lift-up shaft does not rotate.
Lift-up Motor
Lift-up shaft
This mechanism picks up paper from the Cassette Assy and feeds it up to the
intermediate feeding mechanism. The retard separation method is used for
paper separation.
The ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism. ASF Motor's drive force is
transmitted via the ASF Compound Gear A, then through the Pick-up Gear
Group, and rotates the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller.
Table 3-21. ASF Motor's rotational directions and the operation of the Pick-up
Pick-up Roller
mechanism
ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise Retard Roller
Operation of the Pick-up mechanism Feeds paper Not rotates ASF Compound Gear A
On the shafts of the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller, the One Way Clutch
is mounted. When the ASF Motor rotates CCW, the drive force is cut off by the
One Way Clutch, so neither the Pick-up Roller nor Separation Roller rotates. ASF Motor
INTERMEDIATE FEEDING MECHANISM When the ASF Motor rotates counterclockwise1 , its rotational direction is
the same as the engaging direction of the One Way Clutch mounted on the
This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the Cassette Assy or MSF Unit to the Clutch Gear A so the Clutch Gear A rotates the ASF Driven Shaft and trans-
paper feed mechanism. The paper is fed by the Duplex Unit's Intermediate mits the ASF Motor's drive force to the ASF Compound Gear B. Mean-
Roller. while, the Clutch Gear B rotates in the rotational direction opposite to the
engaging direction of the One Way Clutch, so it does not transmit any drive
The intermediate feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor. The ASF force.
Motor's drive force is transmitted via the ASF Gear Group to the one way drive
mechanism. The drive force of the one way drive mechanism is transmitted via Clutch Gear A/B One way drive mechanism
the Duplex Unit's Intermediate Roller Gear Group to the Intermediate Roller. One Way Clutch
Clutch Gear B
Table 3-22. ASF Motor's rotational directions and the operation of the
ASF Driven
intermediate feeding mechanism Shaft
ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
Operation of the intermediate feeding mechanism Normal feeding Normal feeding
The shafts on the Clutch Gear A/B, the One Way Clutch is mounted. Regardless of ASF Motor: CCW
Spur Gear (3)
the ASF Motor's rotational directions, they rotate the Intermediate Roller in the feed-
ing direction (one way). When the ASF Motor rotates clockwise, its rotational direc- One way drive
mechanism
tion is the same as the engaging direction of the One Way Clutch mounted on the
Clutch Gear B, so the Clutch Gear B rotates the ASF Driven Shaft and transmits the
ASF Motor's drive force to the ASF Compound Gear B. Meanwhile, the Clutch Gear Figure 3-37. Intermediate feeding mechanism
A rotates in the rotational direction opposite to the engaging direction of the One
Way Clutch, so it does not transmit any drive force. 1. Rotational direction for skew correction or when operating in synchronization.
For the details, see Paper Feed Mechanism (p. 58).
LD Roller
OPERATION OF THE REAR FEEDING MECHANISM paper set on the Hopper is separated by the LD Roller and Retard Roller and
fed to the intermediate feeding mechanism.
This section explains the operation of rear feed and how the ASF Motor's drive When the LD Roller rotates once, the Change Lever engages with the hook
force is controlled by the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy. on the ASF Clutch Gear and the roller is locked. Then, the ASF Motor's
drive force to the LD Roller is cut off and the rear feed process is complete.2
Drive force control by the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy
The Rear ASF Solenoid Assy controls the operation of the Change Lever by Sideview of rear feeding Solenoid
mechanism: Locked
electrifying the Solenoid1 . The relationship of the electrifying status of the
Solenoid and the status of the Change Lever is as follow. Hook
Table 3-25. Electrifying status of the Solenoid and the operation of the Change
Lever Change Lever
Table 3-26. PF Motor's rotational direction and the operation of the paper feed
mechanism PF Motor
PF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise EJ Roller
Operation of the paper feed mechanism Normal feeding Reverse feeding
According to the rotational direction of the PF Motor, the PF Roller and EJ
Roller rotate in the same direction.
When feeding paper, the paper feed mechanism and the intermediate feeding
mechanism are driven to perform skew correction2 and to feed paper up to the
print start position.
The PF Roller and Intermediate Roller of WF-C869R/WF-C869Ra are driven
separately by the dedicated drive motors. Therefore, so as not to apply too
much back tension or front tension to the paper during loading and feeding, the PF Timing Belt
mechanisms are driven by synchronizing the PF Motor and ASF Motor.
Figure 3-40. Paper feed mechanism
Driving by synchronizing the PF Motor and ASF Motor is called the Duplex Printing Mechanism
synchronized drive, and performed when loading, feeding, and ejecting paper.
This mechanism reverses the paper fed back by the paper feed mechanism after
printing on the front face and feeds the reversed paper back into the paper feed
mechanism.
1. For the details, see Ink System Mechanism (p. 44).
2. Appropriate skew correction type is determined from the following four types according to the print conditions. The duplex printing mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor. The drive path
No skew correction: Loads paper as is without skew correction
Reverse and tap correction: Feeds paper by the Intermediate Roller in normal rotation and the PF Roller in reverse and the operation are the same as those of the intermediate feeding
rotation, then after the paper has reached the PF roller, the above condition is kept for a
specified time to warp the paper to correct the skew.
mechanism3 .
Catch-and release skew correction: Once loads paper up to the PF roller, then stops the Intermediate Roller and re-
verses the
PF roller to warp the paper to correct the skew.
Tapping Method: Feeds paper by the forward rotation of the Intermediate Roller while the PF roller is
stopped. Even after the paper reaches the PF roller and stops with the top edge pressed
against the roller, the roller force is still applied to the paper for a predetermined time
making the paper slightly arch to correct the paper skew. 3. For the details, see Intermediate Feeding Mechanism (p. 55).
This mechanism lifts the paper loaded on the 2nd Cassette Assy up to the paper
pickup position.
2nd Cassette Hopper 2nd Cassette Assy
The 2nd lift-up mechanism is driven by the drive force of the 2nd Lift-up
Motor. The 2nd Lift-up Motor's drive force is transmitted via the 2nd Lift-up
Gear Group to the 2nd Lift-up shaft and rotates the 2nd Lift-up shaft.
Table 3-27. 2nd Lift-up Motor's rotational direction and the operation of the 2nd
lift-up mechanism
2nd Lift-up Motor's rotational direction Clockwise ---
Operation of the 2nd lift-up mechanism Lift-up ---
The 2nd Lift-up Motor drives the 2nd lift-up mechanism only. Therefore, the 2nd Lift-
up Motor never rotates counterclockwise.
2ND ASF MECHANISM Table 3-29. Rotational direction of 2nd ASF Motor and Clutch Gear C/D
This mechanism picks up paper on the 2nd Cassette Assy and feeds it up to the 2nd ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
intermediate feeding mechanism on the printer. The retard separation method is Clutch Gear C's rotational direction Counterclockwise Clockwise
used for paper separation; the same method as for the Cassette Assy. Clutch Gear D's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
The 2nd ASF mechanism is composed of the 2nd pick-up mechanism and 2nd One Way 2nd Separation Roller
intermediate feeding mechanism and driven by the drive force of the 2nd ASF Clutch 2nd Intermediate Roller
Motor. The 2nd ASF Motor's drive force is transmitted via the 2nd ASF
Compound Gear and to the 2nd Pick-up Gear Group and 2nd Intermediate Gear 2nd Pick-up Gear Group
Group, and rotates the 2nd Pick-up Roller, 2nd Separation Roller, and 2nd
Intermediate Roller.
Table 3-28. 2nd ASF Motor's rotational direction and the operation of the 2nd
ASF mechanism Retard Roller
2nd ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise 2nd Pick-up Roller
2nd pick-up mechanism Feeds paper Not rotates
Operation of the 2nd
2nd intermediate feeding Normal feeding Normal feeding 2nd ASF Compound Gear
ASF mechanism
mechanism
1. For the details, see Intermediate Feeding Mechanism (p. 55). Figure 3-42. 2nd ASF mechanism
CIS Module
Scanner Motor
ADF PE Sensor B
CIS Module
1. Feeds paper by the rotation of the Pick-up Roller while the ADF 1st PF Roller is stopped. Even after the paper reaches
the ADF 1st PF Roller, keeps feeding as is to make the paper arch for a predetermined time to correct the paper skew.
Note: *1 : Recommend to replacing the Maintenance Unit and implement periodic maintenance when the print sheet is reached to 300,000 sheet because secure the stable quality at 600,000 sheets of
printer life.
In this timing, error and warning is not displayed.
Therefore, recommend implementation of this work when repair is needed before and after the number of printed sheets reaches 300,000 sheets.
Periodic Maintenance
Maintenance Overview Implementation timing
PF Scale Cleaning Cleaning the PF scale. About 300,000 sheets
Move the PG adjustment cam upward by one notch to accommodate fluctuations in PG
Readjust the PG Adjust Cam
due to wear of carriage bearing part.
Attach the Grease to CR shaft Attach the grease to the CR shaft.
*1 : Recommend to replacing the Maintenance Unit and implement periodic maintenance when the print sheet is reached to 300,000 sheet because secure the stable quality at 600,000 sheets of
printer life.
In this timing, error and warning is not displayed.
Therefore, recommend implementation of this work when repair is needed before and after the number of printed sheets reaches 300,000 sheets.
4
INSTALLATION
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
Installation
(Hardware)
Ink information display
Attaching additional cassette setting (p. 78)
and cabinet (p. 70)
FAX Setting
Attaching main unit and (p. 79)
additional cassette (p. 71)
Attaching stacker
(p. 72)
3. Preparing the additional cassette and cabinet 4. Attaching additional cassette and cabinet
Perform this procedure if an additional cassette and cabinet 4-1. Remove the protective tape and protective material from the
C H E C K
P O IN T
additional cassette and cabinet.
need to be attached.
4-2. Pull out the paper cassette of the additional cassette.
4-3. Insert the additional cassette in the cabinet and secure it with the L-
Check that the following items are included in the package. shaped bracket for connection and additional cassette fixing screws.
Cabinet
Name Remark [Rear]
5. Attaching the printer main unit 6. Attaching the cabinet overturn prevention legs
5-1. Pull out the paper cassette (C2) from the printer. 6-1. Attach the overturn prevention frames (left and right) and secure
them with the overturn prevention leg fixing screws.
5-2. Place the printer on the additional cassette and cabinet.
C H E C K Pass the overturn prevention leg frames through from the
When placing the printer on the additional cassette and
P O IN T cabinet sides, and then attach them while aligning the ribs of
cabinet, there is a risk of damaging the connector of the
the overturn prevention leg frames with the holes in the
additional cassette, so be sure to lower it down vertical while
cabinet.
aligning the four corners of the printer and the additional
cassette.
Front
6-2. Attach the overturn prevention reinforcing frames (front and rear)
and secure them with the overturn prevention leg fixing screws.
5-3. Secure the printer main unit and additional cassette with the
additional cassette fixing screws.
[Front] [Rear]
[Rear] [Front]
6-3. Move the cabinet to the installation position and then lock the casters 7. Attaching ink packs
(x2) at the front of the cabinet. Open the ink case and attach the ink packs.
1-3. Select the time display format. 2. Performing of initial ink filling
Initial ink filling is performed automatically after the power is turned on.
3. Checking operation 3-4. Load paper into the paper cassette (C1) and press [Start].
Nozzle check print
3-1. Select [Settings] from the Home menu.
3-2. Select [Maintenance] from the Settings menu.
3-5. Check the check patterns and make sure that there are no nozzles
missing and all nozzles discharge ink correctly.
If all nozzles discharge ink correctly, press the [OK] button to end
the nozzle check. If any of the nozzles are missing, press the [NG]
button to execute head cleaning.
3-3. Select [Print Head Nozzle Check].
Copy function check If you cannot prepare the document (A3 size),
C H E C K
P O IN T perform the following confirmation.
4.
4.1.3.4 Ink information display setting 3. Select the applicable menu from the Ink Info Change Mode menu.
In this section, explain the setting procedure of ink information display setting
C H E C K In the ink info change mode, operation with the following
P O IN T buttons.
SETTING PROCEDURE
Move the menu (move to upward) : [2] button
1. Press hold down the power button while pressing the [# button] from the Move the menu (move to downward) : [8] button
power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD. Perform : [#] button
Figure 4-2. Procedure of ink information display setting(1) Figure 4-3. Procedure of ink information display setting (2)
2. Enter ID number of “Ink Info Change Mode”, and start the Ink Info 4. Select the applicable menu from the following menu.
Change Mode.
Ink Low Dis Change
C H E C K Regarding the ID Number of Ink info Change Mode. Ink Low Disp?
P O IN T Contact to the Service support.
DISP: Press [*] button
ID number input method is belows. NON DISP: Press [Reset] button
Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button Nochange: Press [Power] button
5. The following screen is displayed after changing the setting. 4.1.3.5 Fax Settings
Confirm the applicable item is changing, and turn off the printer.
C H E C K This work is not required if the user will not use the fax
Ink Low Dis Change P O IN T function.
Ink Disp Change is Complete!
Ink Rest: DISP
Ink Low: NON DISP
1. Connect the telephone line to the printer.
Press [Power] Button to finish.
2. Select [Settings] from the Home menu.
3. Select [Main Unit Settings] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Setup Wizard].
4. Press [Set] to run the fax setup wizard. 7. Select whether or not to use a telephone connected to the printer in the
Receive Mode Setting screen.
Use: Press [Yes] to proceed to the next step.
Not use: Press [No] and go to step 9. Receive mode is set to [Auto].
5. Enter the name of the sender (e.g., company name) in the sender name
input screen.
6. Enter the fax number of the sender in the sender number input screen.
9. Confirm the settings in the Setting Confirmation screen and then press If an error is displayed in the report, resolve the problem
C H E C K
[Next]. P O IN T according to the instructions in the report.
To correct a setting, press the [←] button to return to the previous screen. If the Select Connection Line screen appears, select the
connection line. When connected to a private branch
exchange (PBX) or terminal adapter, [Private Branch
Exchange (PBX)] must be selected.
If the Dial Tone Detection Selection screen appears, select
[Do not detect]. However, when [Do not detect] is set,
there is a risk of a wrong number being dialed due to the
first digit of a fax number not being dialed.
To individually set the items without using the fax setup
wizard or change items that were already set with the fax
setup wizard, select
10. Press [Start Diagnosis] to perform diagnosis of the fax function. [Main Unit Settings] ? [Fax Settings] and then select and
When a message for printing the diagnosis results appears, press the [Print] set each corresponding individual item from the Fax
button to print the fax function diagnosis report. Settings screen.
In an environment in which an external dial number such
as “0” or “9” is required such as an office that uses
extension telephones, set the following settings.
1. Select [Settings] from the Home menu.
2. Select [Main Unit Settings] > [Fax Settings] > [Basic
Settings] > [Connection Line] in this order.
3. Select [Private Branch Exchange (PBX)].
4. Select [Use] in the External Dial Number screen.
5. Press [External Dial Number], enter the external dial
number that is used, and press [OK].
After setting these settings, enter "#" instead of the actual
external dial number when sending a fax to an external
number.
5
SERVICE SUPPORT MODE
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
5.1 Service Support Mode 2. Enter ID number of Service Support Mode, and start the service support mode.
Service support mode is a service dedicated special mode that can be started by
a special operation, and allows you to execute functions including adjustment,
inspection, and individual operation check functions.
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]]
SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#]
5.1.2 Service mode startup and operating procedures
1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [#] button from the ***_
power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD.
Power button
Operating procedure
• Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button
• Number input (move in descending order) : [8] button
[#] button • Input digit shift : [6] button
• Execute : [#] button
Figure 5-1. Star operation of panel
3. Press a number input button ([2] button or [8] button) to enter a number from Input ID is not found!!
1 to 9. Please wait Poweroff...
4. Repeat the above procedure to enter the specified ID number.
5. When all of the ID number is entered, press the execute button ([#] button). (A
confirmation message appears.)
6. Press the execute button ([#] button) to execute or press the input digit shift
button ([6] button) to enter the number again.
Individual Acon Check Before Repair Operaon:MENU Adjustment : MENU Maintenance : MENU SWAP Mech Unit : MENU CR Unlock Power OFF
䕔Out Put : MENU 䕔B90 Print Head 䕔B00 Adjustment-Input B Number 䕔C00 Maintenance-Input C Number
䕔A01 Auto Check Individual Acon 䕕B43 Head angular Adjustment Mech
䕕B20 APG Move Check
䕕B21 CR Scale Check 䕕B44 Head angular Adjustment So
䕔A02 CR Unlock Power Off2 䕕B22 PW Sensor Shuer move 䕕B45 PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust
䕕B23 PE Sensor 䕕B46 Bi-d Adjust
䕕B24 Temp, and hum. Sensor Check 䕕B47 PTS Posion Adjust
䕔A00 Individual -Input A Number 䕕B48 Bi-d Band Adjust
䕔 Prinng Check : MENU 䕕B49 PW Sensor Correct
䕕B50 Print Start Pos. FASF
䕕B51 Print Start Pos. RASF
䕕B26 Nozzle Noise Check 䕕B52 PE Adjust FASF
䕕B27 Nozzle Rank Categorise 䕕B53 PE Adjust RASF
䕕B28 Nozzle Detect Move Check 䕕B54 Feed Adjust
䕕B29 Check Paern Prinng 䕕B55 Band Feed Adjust
䕕B30 RGB Paern Prinng 䕕B65 A - B BT Band Adjust
䕕B31 Ruled Line Paern
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
START
Service Request
Hearing
Ask to send Refer to Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom (P. 153) and
printer info. now
isolate the trouble.
Problem NO
solved?
YES
END A B
A B
END
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if a paper jam has occurred in the printer Remove the paper jammed in the path.
920000 Paper jam error ---
mechanism. “ Paper jam error” (p. 111)
Occurs if mechanism initialization was not
performed normally because removal of the CR
920001 CR protective material removal forgotten error --- Remove the CR protective material.
protective material or protective tape had been
forgotten when the power was first turned on.
920021 Paper Cassette (C1)
920022 Paper Cassette (C2)
Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor
920023 Not feeding error Paper Cassette (C3) “ Not Feeding Error” (p. 109)
when paper feeding was executed.
920024 Paper Cassette (C4)
920025 Rear tray
920041 Paper Cassette (C1) Check the feed roller attachment state and
Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor
920042 Paper Cassette (C2) reattach the feed roller.
when paper feeding was executed.
Not feeding error (feed roller replacement) * If this error occurs again later, isolate the cause
920043 Paper Cassette (C3) (Occurs only immediately after feed roller
as described in the remedy procedure for the not
maintenance.)
920044 Paper Cassette (C4) feeding error.
920061 Paper Cassette (C1) Occurs if separation of the paper with the Fan the paper and then reload the paper in the
920062 Paper Cassette (C2) separation roller could not be performed well, so paper cassette.
Stack collapsed error the second sheet is in a half fed state and in a
920063 Paper Cassette (C3) If this error subsequently occurs frequently, see “
position different from the original paper feed
Stack Collapsed Error” (p. 110)
920064 Paper Cassette (C4) start position.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
920201 Paper Cassette (C1)
Load paper into the corresponding cassette or
920202 Paper Cassette (C2) tray.
Occurs if there is determined to be no paper
920203 No paper error Paper Cassette (C3) If this error is not resolved, refer to the
when printing is executed.
920204 Paper Cassette (C4) following.
“ No Paper Error” (p. 106)
920205 Rear tray
920221 Paper Cassette (C1) Attach the paper cassette.
920222 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the specified paper cassette is If this error is not resolved, refer to the
No cassette/tray error
920223 Paper Cassette (C3) determined to be not attached. following.
920224 Paper Cassette (C4) “ No Cassette Error” (p. 107)
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
920321 Paper Cassette (C1)
920322 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if paper corresponding to the paper type
Match the paper type setting of the driver, etc.
920323 Paper type mismatch error Paper Cassette (C3) setting of the driver, etc. is not set on the main
and the actual paper type.
920324 Paper Cassette (C4) unit.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
920500 Front cover open error ---
920501 Rear cover open error --- Close the corresponding cover.
Occurs if the corresponding cover is in an open If this error is not resolved, refer to the
920502 Rear cover open error (additional cassette) ---
state. following.
920503 Ink case open error (P1) --- “ Cover Open Error” (p. 107)
920504 Ink case open error (P2) ---
The CR was left in a stopped state out of the
920550 Left outside CAP error --- home position for at least 30 minutes and the Press the [OK] button in the Warning screen.
process was canceled.
920601 Black
920602 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of ink goes
Ink end error Replace the ink pack.
920603 Magenta below the limit value.
920604 Yellow
920621 Black
920622 Cyan
Ink recognition read error
920623 Magenta
920624 Yellow Occurs if the ink pack is in a state in which it
“ Ink Recognition Error” (p. 109)
920641 Black cannot be recognized
920642 Cyan
Ink recognition write error
920643 Magenta
920644 Yellow
920661 Black
920662 Cyan
Ink not attached error Occurs if the ink pack is not attached. Attach the ink pack.
920663 Magenta
920664 Yellow
920681 Black
920682 Remaining amount of ink for initial filling Cyan Occurs if there is less than the amount of ink
Attach an ink pack for initial filling.
920683 insufficient warning error Magenta required for filling when initial filling starts.
920684 Yellow
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
920701 Black
920702 Cyan Occurs if an ink cartridge supplied with the
Attach other than the ink pack for initial filling
Error for initial filling I/C product was used for ink replacement for other
920703 Magenta (ASP ink pack).
than initial ink filling.
920704 Yellow
920721 Black
920722 Cyan Occurs if the inserted ink is unrecognizable
Ink recognition error (non-genuine) Attach the correct ink pack.
920723 Magenta because it is non-genuine ink.
920724 Yellow
920741 Black
920742 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of ink is
Attach an ink pack with the amount required for
Remaining amount of ink insufficient error insufficient when executing strong cleaning and
920743 Magenta cleaning.
ink replacement.
920744 Yellow
Occurs if the usage amount of the maintenance
920900 Maintenance box full error --- Replace the maintenance box.
box exceeded the limit value.
920901 No maintenance box error --- Occurs if there is no maintenance box attached. Attach a maintenance box.
920902 Maintenance box recognition error (read) --- Occurs if the maintenance box cannot be
“ M/B Recognition Error” (p. 108)
920903 Maintenance box recognition error (write) --- recognized.
Occurs if the remaining amount of the
Remaining amount of maintenance box Attach a maintenance box with the amount
920904 --- maintenance box is insufficient when executing
insufficient error required for cleaning.
strong cleaning and ink replacement.
Occurs if page data that uses a large amount of
920980 Memory full error --- memory is sent and the main unit memory
capacity is exceeded.
Occurs if print data that uses a large amount of
920981 Memory insufficient error --- memory is sent and the main unit memory Reduce the amount of memory used for print
becomes insufficient. page data by, for example, splitting up the print
Memory insufficient error (number of print pages.
920982 --- Occurs if a number of print copies data of a data
copies)
size exceeding the free space is sent in the state
Memory insufficient error (resolution
920983 --- in which there is little free space in the main unit
reduction)
memory.
920984 Memory insufficient error (reverse printing) ---
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if manual feeding is specified from the
920985 Manual feed error --- Load paper into the rear tray.
PCL driver and then printing is executed.
921001 Paper Cassette (C1)
921002 Paper Cassette (C2) Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
Displayed at the point in time when the number
(The error will be displayed later every 300
921003 Feed roller end of life approaching warning Paper Cassette (C3) of sheets for replacement of a periodically
replaced part has reached 97%. sheets or when the power is turned on until the
921004 Paper Cassette (C4) end of life of the part is reached.)
921005 Rear tray
921021 Paper Cassette (C1) Temporarily turn the error display off (if will
921022 Paper Cassette (C2) continue use without replacing the part).
Occurs when printing ends or the power turns on
• Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
921023 Feed roller end of life reached warning Paper Cassette (C3) if the print count of the corresponding cassette
(The error will be displayed later every 300
921024 Paper Cassette (C4) has reached the number of pages for its life.
sheets or when the power is turned on.)
921025 Rear tray Replace the part and reset the internal counter.
921201 Black
921202 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of the ink pack
Ink low ---
921203 Magenta has become near the limit value.
921204 Yellow
Occurs if the usage amount of the maintenance
921400 Maintenance box nearly full --- ---
box has become near the limit value.
930000 ADF paper jam --- Occurs if a paper jam occurred in the ADF unit. Remove the paper jammed in the path.
930001 ADF cover open error --- Occurs if the ADF cover is in an open state.
Split up the document and send it in parts.
Occurs if there is no memory remaining when
940000 Send memory storage error --- Specify direct printing and then send the
fax scanning.
document.
Occurs if there is no memory remaining during
940001 Receive memory storage error --- fax receiving or if a document exceeding 100 Process the inbox data (print, cancel, or delete).
pages is received at one time.
Occurs if dialing the other party's fax number
940002 Sending incomplete (no dial tone) --- Check the telephone line and then try again.
failed because a dial tone could not be detected.
Occurs if dialing the other party's fax number
940003 Sending incomplete (busy) --- Wait a while and then try again.
failed because the other party's line was busy.
Occurs if dialing the other party's fax number
940004 Send incomplete (no response) --- Wait a while and then try again.
failed because there was no response.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if the modular cords are connected to
940005 Sending incomplete (reverse insertion) --- Connect them to LINE and EXT correctly.
LINE and EXT in reverse.
Occurs if the modular cord is not connected to Check the telephone line and connect the
940006 Sending incomplete (no connection) ---
the telephone line. modular cord.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the email server
940007 DNS error (email) ---
are invalid. Check the DNS settings of the printer.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the save Check the DNS server settings.
940008 DNS error (folder) ---
destination are invalid.
Check the authentication method.
• Check the SMTP server address and port.
Occurs if the authentication settings of the email
940009 Authentication error (email) --- • Check the POP3 server address and port.
server are invalid.
Check the account name.
Check the password.
Occurs if one of the following settings is Check the following.
invalid. • Folder path
940010 Authentication error (folder) --- • Save destination • User name
• User name • Password
• Password setting • Account name
Check the SMTP server address and port.
Check the POP3 server address and port.
Check the network settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
Check that the network cable is physically
Occurs if a communication error occurred
940011 Communication error (email) --- connected.
during email forwarding.
Check whether or not the address is correct.
Check the access point settings.
Check the firewall settings.
Check the server (possibility of server being
down).
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Check the folder path.
Check that the network cable is physically
connected.
Check the network settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
Check the access point settings.
Occurs if a communication error occurred
940012 Communication error (folder) --- Check the firewall settings.
during folder forwarding.
Check the server (possibility of server being
down).
Check whether or not a file of the same name
in the save destination has been left open.
Check whether or not a file of the same name
in the save destination is write prohibited.
Check that the following save destination
settings are correct.
• Communication mode
Occurs if the specified save destination did not
940013 Destination invalid error (folder) --- • Folder path
exist.
• User name
• Password
• Port number
Occurs if writing could not be performed
940014 Save destination space insufficient error --- because there is no free space in the save Free up space in the save destination.
destination folder.
Occurs if the received data the user is attempting
940015 No received data --- ---
to print again has been discarded.
Occurs if the preview button is pressed when
940016 Preview not possible --- Disable direct transmission.
direct transmission is in the enabled state.
Do the following depending on the intended
use.
Color transmission not possible for Occurs if transmission at a specified time is When wish to transmit in color
940017 ---
transmission at specified time specified and then the color start key is pressed. • Transmit without specifying a time.
When wish to specify a time and then transmit
• Select black and white and then transmit.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Color transmission not possible for polling Occurs if polling transmission is specified and
940018 ---
transmission then the color start key is pressed.
Select black and white and then transmit.
Color not possible when pending document Occurs if storage of pending documents is
940019 ---
storage specified and then the color start key is pressed.
Do the following depending on the intended use.
When wish to transmit in color
Color transmission to multiple destinations not Occurs if multiple destinations are specified and
940020 --- • Transmit to one destination at a time.
possible then the color start key is pressed.
When wish to perform fax broadcasting
• Select black and white and then transmit.
Do the following depending on the intended use.
When wish to transmit in color
Occurs if duplex scanning is specified and then
940021 Duplex color transmission not possible --- • Cancel duplex scanning.
the color start key is pressed.
When wish to perform duplex scanning
• Select black and white and then transmit.
Do the following depending on the intended use.
When wish to transmit in color
Occurs if the color start key is pressed when the
940022 Color transmission not possible when ECM off --- • Enable the ECM setting.
ECM setting is in the disabled state.
When the ECM setting cannot be changed
• Select black and white.
Occurs if the duplex scanning setting is enabled
Disable either the duplex scanning setting or
940023 Duplex direct transmission not possible --- and the direct transmission setting is enabled
direct transmission setting.
and then the color start key is pressed.
Occurs if the on-hook dial button is pressed Wait until the line becomes available and then
940024 Hook operation disabled ---
when the line is in use. try again.
Occurs if a number is input when the dial buffer Wait until the input dial data is processed and the
940025 Dial buffer ---
is full with on-hook dialing. buffer space becomes available.
940026 Off-hook fax use prohibited --- --- ---
Occurs if manual transmission is started in the
state in which transmission is not possible
940027 Transmission not possible error --- (during printing, while waiting to transmit at a Wait for the function to end and then try again.
specified time, during scanning, etc.) because of
another function.
Occurs if manually print report of print function
940028 Starting fax printing not possible --- Wait until printing ends and then try again.
diagnosis results during printing.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if fax printing is started when the set
940029 Paper size mismatch error --- paper size is smaller than the paper size of the Set the correct paper size.
fax data to be printed.
Occurs if the media is removed during saving or
940030 Media error (media removed) --- Connect the media and then try again.
creating a folder.
Occurs if media for saving received faxes is Connect media with free space and then try
940031 Media error (memory full) ---
inserted but the media has no free space. again.
Occurs if connected media for saving received
faxes and attempted to create a folder for saving Cancel the media setting (write prohibited).
940032 Memory error (write prohibited) ---
received faxes in the storage media but the Connect media that is not write protected.
media is write protected.
Reconnect the media.
Occurs if a write error occurred during saving
940033 Media error (failure) --- Connect different media. (A folder must be
received faxes.
created by storage dedicated folder creation.)
Occurs if attempted to change the fax settings Make sure fax usage has finished before
940034 Fax function in use ---
while the fax function was in use. changing the settings.
Occurs if attempted to change the fax settings
Make sure changing of the fax settings from a
940035 PC in use --- while the fax settings were being changed from
PC has finished before changing the settings.
a PC.
Occurs if attempted to execute the fax function
Make sure the running function has finished
940036 Other function being executed --- when a function that cannot be executed at the
before trying again.
same time is running.
Occurs if email is selected in the forwarding
940037 Email server not set --- settings when the email server settings have not Configure the email server settings.
been configured.
Occurs if email is selected in the forwarding
Check the connection with the email server and
940038 No connection to email server --- settings in the state in which there is no
establish a connection.
connection with the email server.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the email server Check the DNS settings of the printer.
950000 DNS error for Scan to Email ---
are invalid. Check the DNS server settings.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Check the SMTP server address and port.
Check the POP3 server address and port.
Check the network setting related items.
• IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
→ Perform email server connection diagnosis
(Scan to Email function only)
Occurs if a communication error occurred
950001 Communication error for Scan to Email --- Check that the network cable is physically
during Scan to Email execution.
connected.
Check whether or not the address is correct.
Check the access point settings.
Check the firewall settings.
Check the server (possibility of server being
down).
Check the authentication method.
• Check the SMTP server address and port.
Occurs if the authentication settings of the email
950002 Authentication error for Scan to Email --- • Check the POP3 server address and port.
server are invalid.
Check the account name.
Check the password.
Change the scan settings (increase the
maximum attachment file size).
Occurs if the size of the scanning data to be
Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
950003 Size exceeded for Scan to Email --- attached exceeded the maximum attachment file
the size by changing the resolution or
size.
compression ratio).
Reduce the number of document pages.
Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
950004 Insufficient memory for Scan to Email ---
Email execution. before trying again.
ADF document removal required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be removed from
950005 --- Remove the document from the ADF.
Email the ADF unit during Scan to Email execution.
ADF document loading required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be loaded in the
950006 --- Load the document in the ADF.
Email ADF unit during Scan to Email execution.
Occurs if the number of document scanning
Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
950007 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Email --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
Occurs if the Scan to Email function is started
950008 Email server not set for Scan to Email --- when the email server settings have not been Configure the email server settings.
configured.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if the DNS settings of the save Check the DNS settings of the printer.
950020 DNS error for Scan to Folder ---
destination are invalid. Check the DNS server settings.
Check that the following save destination
settings are correct.
• Communication mode
• Folder path
• Connection mode
• Port number
Occurs if a communication error occurred Check that the network cable is physically
950021 Communication error for Scan to Folder ---
during Scan to Folder execution. connected.
Check the network setting related items.
• IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
Check the access point settings.
Check the firewall settings.
Check the server (possibility of server being
down).
Check that the following save destination
settings are correct.
Occurs if any of the user name and password • Communication mode
950022 Authentication error for Scan to Folder --- settings for accessing the specified save • Folder path
destination is invalid. • User name
• Password
• Port number
Ensure there is sufficient storage area in the
save destination folder.
Occurs if the scanned data did not fit in the Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
950023 Size exceeded error for Scan to Folder ---
folder of the save destination. the size by changing the resolution or
compression ratio).
Reduce the number of document pages.
Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
950024 Insufficient memory for Scan to Folder ---
folder execution. before trying again.
ADF document removal required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be removed from
950025 --- Remove the document from the ADF.
Folder the ADF unit during Scan to Folder execution.
ADF document loading required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be loaded in the
950026 --- Load the document in the ADF.
Folder ADF unit during Scan to Folder execution.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if the number of document scanning
Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
950027 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Folder --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
Check that the following save destination
settings are correct.
• Communication mode
Occurs if the specified save destination did not • Folder path
950028 Destination invalid for Scan to Folder ---
exist.
• User name
• Password
• Port number
Remove the file with the same name in the
Occurs if a file name in the save destination is save destination folder.
950029 File name duplicated for Scan to Folder ---
duplicated. Set the file header to a different character
string and then execute again.
Occurs if a communication error occurred
950040 Communication error for Scan to Cloud --- Check that there is a connection to the network.
during destination acquisition.
Occurs when the Epson Connect service of the Enable the service in Epson Connect settings of
950041 Service stopped for Scan to Cloud ---
printer is paused. the setup.
Occurs if the Epson Connect service is not Register the Epson Connect service to the
950042 Service not registered for Scan to Cloud ---
registered. printer.
Occurs if not connected to the Epson Connect
server due to one of the following reasons.
When the login process is performed after Check that there is a connection to the
950043 Not logged in for Scan to Cloud --- printer startup but a destination search is network.
started during the process. Wait a while and then try again.
When the login process failed due to
communication error
ADF document removal required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be removed from
950044 --- Remove the document from the ADF.
Cloud the ADF unit during Scan to Cloud execution.
ADF document loading required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be loaded in the
950045 --- Load the document in the ADF.
Cloud ADF unit during Scan to Cloud execution.
Occurs if the scanned data exceeded the size of Reduce the number of document pages and then
950046 Size exceeded for Scan to Cloud ---
data that can be transmitted. try again.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if the destination is invalid.
(Occurs if the destination information on the
950047 Invalid destination for Scan to Cloud --- server is rewritten during the period from Set the destination again.
acquiring the destination list to transmitting the
data.)
Occurs if not even one destination is registered Register a destination to the Epson Connect
950048 Destination not registered for Scan to Cloud ---
to the server. service.
Occurs if the number of document scanning
Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
950049 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Cloud --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
950060 Communication error for AirPrint (eSCL) ---
950070 Communication error for Scan to WSD --- Occurs if a communication error occurred
Check that there is a connection to the network.
Communication error for Scan to Document during execution of each function.
950080 ---
Capture Pro
Check whether or not the destination is currently
PC in use error for Scan to Document Capture communicating with another printer.
950081 --- Occurs if the destination PC is busy.
Pro (If communication is in progress, make sure
communication has finished before trying again.)
No applicable PC for Scan to Document Occurs if not connected with a PC compatible Connect with a PC compatible with Document
950082 ---
Capture Pro with Document Capture Pro. Capture Pro.
Occurs if a communication error occurred
Communication error for Scan to Document
950090 --- during Scan to Document Capture Pro Server Check that there is a connection to the network.
Capture Pro Server
execution.
Server in use error for Scan to Document
950091 --- Occurs if the server is busy. Wait a while and then try again.
Capture Pro Server
No response for Scan to Document Capture Pro Occurs if a server compatible with Document Connect with a server compatible with
950092 ---
Server Capture Pro Server could not be found. Document Capture Pro Server.
No job error for Scan to Document Capture Pro Occurs if not even one job is registered to the
950093 --- Register a job on Document Capture Pro Server.
Server server.
Check that there is a connection to the
Occurs if a communication error occurred network.
950100 Communication error for SMTP Server ---
during communication to SMTP Server. Check mail sever setting
Check that SMTP Server is operated correctly.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Check that there is a connection to the
Occurs if a communication error occurred network.
950101 Communication error for POP3 Server ---
during communication to POP3 Server. Check mail server setting
Check that POP3 Server is operated correctly.
Check mail server setting.
Occurs if trouble occurred during connection to
950102 DNS error for mail server (SMTP) --- (SMTP Server Address)
SMTP Server.
Check the connection state to DNS Server.
Check mail server setting.
Occurs if trouble occurred during connection to
950103 DNS error for mail server (POP3) --- (POP3 Server Address)
POP3 Server.
Check the connection state to DNS Server.
Occurs if authentication process is failure on Check following mail server setting.
950104 Authentication error for SMTP Server ---
SMTP Server. Authentication method
Occurs if authentication process is failure on Authentication account
950105 Authentication error for POP3 Server ---
POP3 Server. Authentication password
Occurs if printer's date and time setting is
950106 Certificate error (Date/time) --- incorrect, or if you have a root certificate for the Check date and time setting of printer.
server, but it has expired.
Occurs if printer does not have a root certificate Check that printer have route certificate
corresponding to the server or if the CA corresponding to the server.
950107 Certificate error (CA certificate) ---
certificate for verifying the partner server is not Check that CA certificate for verifying the
imported. Partner server is imported.
Occurs if certificate obtained from the server is Check that certificate obtained from the server is
950108 Certificate error (other) ---
broken. correctly.
Occurs if mismatch SMTP connection setting on
Secure connection mismatch
950109 --- server and Client, or server is not support SMTP
(Server is not SSL)
Secure Connection (SSL Connection).
Occurs if mismatch SMTP connection setting on
Secure connection mismatch
950110 --- server and client, or if Server request the SSL/ Check that secure connection setting on Sever
(Server is SSL/TLS)
TLS connection to SMTP Secure Connection. and Client are matched.
Occurs if mismatch SMTP connection setting on
Secure connection mismatch server and client, or if Server request the
950111 ---
(Server is STARTTLS) STARTTLS connection to SMTP Secure
Connection.
SMTP server connection failure Check following mail server setting.
Occurs if printer communication by using the no
950112 (“Connection to server failed” of “Sever is not --- SMTP server address
support protocol.
SMTP Server) SMPT Server port number
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
SMTP Server Authentication method mismatch Change the Authentication method of printer to
950113 ---
(SMTP-Auth is necessary) Occurs if mismatch the authentication method SMTP Authentication.
SMTP Server Authentication method mismatch on Server and client. Change the Authentication method of printer to
950114 ---
(SMTP-Auth is not necessary) POP before SMTP.
Occurs if source address specification is
950115 Source address specification error --- Check source address.
mistake.
Ensure there is sufficient storage area in the
storage media.
The storage media space for scanning data is Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
990000 Insufficient space for Scan to External Memory ---
insufficient. the size by changing the resolution or
compression ratio).
Reduce the number of document pages.
Cancel the write prohibited settings of the
990001 Write prohibited for Scan to External Memory --- Occurs if the storage media is write prohibited.
storage media.
Occurs if a folder cannot be created in the
990002 Folder creation for Scan to External Memory --- Connect different media.
storage media.
The storage media was removed during Scan to
990003 Card removed for Scan to External Memory --- Connect the media.
External Media execution.
Insufficient memory for Scan to External Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
990004 ---
Memory External Memory execution. before trying again.
Try again.
Occurs if saving failed due to an error other than
990005 Other error for Scan to External Memory --- (If the same error occurs again after trying again,
the above.
contact service support.)
Occurs if the number of document scanning
Addition limit exceeded for Scan to External Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
990006 --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
Memory remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
Occurs if the connected media is not formatted
990100 External memory recognition not possible --- Connect different media.
or is in an unsupported format.
Occurs if attempted to execute the external
Simultaneous operation execution error for Make sure the running function has finished
990101 --- memory printing function when a function that
external memory printing before trying again.
cannot be executed at the same time is running.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Add the PC printing privilege for the
Occurs if user authentication was successful but
990200 Security (user restriction) print restriction --- corresponding user in WebConfig and
there is no PC printing privilege for that user.
NetConfig.
Occurs if user authentication failed.
Check that the user name and password are
Occurs if the setting for permitting execution
correct.
of a job with no authentication information is
990201 Security (user restriction) authentication error --- Set the setting for permitting execution of a
set to “Prohibit” when a print job with no
job with no authentication information to
authentication information (user name and
“Permit”.
password) is received.
Occurs if the number of document scanning
990300 Memory full error for copying --- Split up the document and scan it in parts.
sheets exceeded the memory capacity.
Trouble related parts and causes 2 Check the paper detection sensor lever Go to step 3 Replace the
Check that the paper detection sensor lever is not paper
Paper incorrectly loaded damaged. detection
Paper detection sensor failure sensor lever.
3 Check the paper detection sensor Replace the Replace the
Paper detection sensor lever failure
Perform an individual action check and make sure main board paper
Troubleshooting that there is no sensor output error. (If the detection
• A50 to A54 Sensor Check - Cassette ○ trouble is sensor.
not
resolved,
contact the
service
support)
C H E C K In this product, in order to improve the analysis of paper jam error, sub code is allocated for each paper jam occurrence factor.
P O IN T When a paper jam occurs, sub code is recorded simultaneously with a paper jam error.
(Regarding the detail of paper jam occurrence factor, refer to)
Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam
001 C1 normal rotation 037 C2 normal rotation 073 C3 normal rotation 109 C4 normal rotation 145 Duplex normal rotation 181 Rear Tray normal rotation
PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached
002 C1 reverse 038 C2 reverse 074 C3 reverse 110 C4 reverse 146 Duplex reverse 182 Rear Tray reverse
PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached
003 C1 normal rotation 039 C2 normal rotation 075 C3 normal rotation 111 C4 normal rotation 147 Duplex normal rotation 183 Rear Tray normal rotation
PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off
004 C1 reverse 040 C2 reverse 076 C3 reverse 112 C4 reverse 148 Duplex reverse 184 Rear Tray reverse
PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off
005 C1 PW sensor Unreached 041 C2 PW sensor Unreached 077 C3 PW sensor Unreached 113 C4 PW sensor Unreached 149 Duplex PW sensor 185 Rear Tray PW sensor
Unreached Unreached
006 C1 ME sensor Unreached 042 C2 ME sensor Unreached 078 C3 ME sensor Unreached 114 C4 ME sensor Unreached 150 Duplex ME sensor 186 Rear Tray ME sensor
Unreached Unreached
007 C1 FE sensor Unreached 043 C2 FE sensor Unreached 079 C3 FE sensor Unreached 115 C4 FE sensor Unreached 151 Duplex FE sensor 187 Rear Tray FE sensor
Unreached Unreached
008 C1 FE sensor Unreached B 044 C2 FE sensor Unreached B 080 C3 FE sensor Unreached B 116 C4 FE sensor Unreached B 152 Duplex FE sensor 188 Rear Tray FE sensor
Unreached B Unreached B
009 C1 FE sensor not off 045 C2 FE sensor not off 081 C3 FE sensor not off 117 C4 FE sensor not off 153 Duplex FE sensor not off 189 Rear Tray FE sensor not off
010 C1 FE2 sensor Unreached 046 C2 FE2 sensor Unreached 082 C3 FE2 sensor Unreached 118 C4 FE2 sensor Unreached 154 Duplex FE2 sensor 190 Rear Tray FE2 sensor
Unreached Unreached
011 C1 FE2 sensor not off 047 C2 FE2 sensor not off 083 C3 FE2 sensor not off 119 C4 FE2 sensor not off 155 Duplex FE2 sensor not off 191 Rear Tray FE2 sensor not
off
012 C1 FE3 sensor Unreached 048 C2 FE3 sensor Unreached 084 C3 FE3 sensor Unreached 120 C4 FE3 sensor Unreached 156 Duplex FE3 sensor 192 Rear Tray FE3 sensor
Unreached Unreached
013 C1 FE3 sensor not off 049 C2 FE3 sensor not off 085 C3 FE3 sensor not off 121 C4 FE3 sensor not off 157 Duplex FE3 sensor not off 193 Rear Tray FE3 sensor not
off
014 C1 FE4 sensor Unreached 050 C2 FE4 sensor Unreached 086 C3 FE4 sensor Unreached 122 C4 FE4 sensor Unreached 158 Duplex FE4 sensor 194 Rear Tray FE4 sensor
Unreached Unreached
015 C1 FE4 sensor not off 051 C2 FE4 sensor not off 087 C3 FE4 sensor not off 123 C4 FE4 sensor not off 159 Duplex FE4 sensor not off 195 Rear Tray FE4 sensor not
off
016 C1 ME sensor not off 052 C2 ME sensor not off 088 C3 ME sensor not off 124 C4 ME sensor not off 160 Duplex ME sensor not off 196 Rear Tray ME sensor not off
017 C1 CR Motor 053 C2 CR Motor 089 C3 CR Motor 125 C4 CR Motor 161 Duplex CR Motor 197 Rear Tray CR Motor
018 C1 PF Motor 054 C2 PF Motor 090 C3 PF Motor 126 C4 PF Motor 162 Duplex PF Motor 198 Rear Tray PF Motor
Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam
019 C1 ASF Motor 055 C2 ASF Motor 091 C3 ASF Motor 127 C4 ASF Motor 163 Duplex ASF Motor 199 Rear Tray ASF Motor
020 C1 ASF2 Motor 056 C2 ASF2 Motor 092 C3 ASF2 Motor 128 C4 ASF2 Motor 164 Duplex ASF2 Motor 200 Rear Tray ASF2 Motor
021 C1 ASF3 Motor 057 C2 ASF3 Motor 093 C3 ASF3 Motor 129 C4 ASF3 Motor 165 Duplex ASF3 Motor 201 Rear Tray ASF3 Motor
022 C1 ASF4 Motor 058 C2 ASF4 Motor 094 C3 ASF4 Motor 130 C4 ASF4 Motor 166 Duplex ASF4 Motor 202 Rear Tray ASF4 Motor
023 C1 NF error 059 C2 NF error 095 C3 NF error 131 C4 NF error 167 Duplex NF error 203 Rear Tray NF error
024 C1 Stack collapsed 060 C2 Stack collapsed 096 C3 Stack collapsed 132 C4 Stack collapsed 168 Duplex Stack collapsed 204 Rear Tray Stack collapsed
026 Home seek failure 062 Home seek failure 098 Home seek failure 134 Home seek failure 170 Home seek failure 206 Home seek failure
027 CR protective material 063 CR protective material 099 CR protective material 135 CR protective material 171 CR protective material 207 CR protective material
removal forgotten error removal forgotten error removal forgotten error removal forgotten error removal forgotten error removal forgotten error
028 Emergency shutdown 064 Emergency shutdown 100 Emergency shutdown 136 Emergency shutdown 172 Emergency shutdown 208 Emergency shutdown
Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor
Paper jam occurrence Paper jam occurrence
Detail Detail
factor factor
Normal rotation This error occurs when the paper does not reach the PE FE3 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette
PE sensor Unreached sensor at the time of feeding paper from the corresponding (3rd) does not detect the paper at the time of feeding the
paper feeder. paper from corresponding paper feeder.
Reverse PE sensor This error occurs when the paper does not reach the PE FE3 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (3rd)
Unreached sensor at the time of pulling in paper at duplex print from the does not becoming the off condition at the time of feeding
corresponding paper feeder. the paper with specified step after the paper reaches to the
feed sensor of option cassette (3rd).
Normal rotation This error occurs when PE Sensor is not becoming the off
PE Sensor not off condition at the time of the printer fed the paper with FE4 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette
specified step after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. (4th) does not detect the paper at the time of feeding the
paper from corresponding paper feeder.
Reverse PE Sensor not off This error occurs when PE Sensor is not becoming the off
condition at the time of the feeding the paper with specified FE4 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (4th)
step at duplex print after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. does not becoming the off condition at the time of feeding
the paper with specified step after the paper reaches to the
PW Sensor Unreached This error occurs when PW Sensor does not detect the paper
feed sensor of option cassette (4th).
edge at the time of feeding the paper from with specified step
after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. ME Sensor not off This error occurs when the Duplex Print Assy Paper
Detection Sensor does not become the off condition at the
ME Sensor Unreached This error occurs when the paper does not reach the Duplex
time of feeding the paper with specified step after the paper
Print Assy Paper Detection Sensor at the time of feeding
reaches to the Duplex Print Assy Paper Detection Sensor.
paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
CR Motor This error occurs when detecting the speed down of CR
FE Sensor Unreached This error occurs when feed sensor does not detect the paper
movement at the time of feeding and printing the paper from
at the time of feeding the paper with specified step from the
corresponding paper feeder.
corresponding paper feeder.
PF Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of PF
FE Sensor Unreached B This error occurs when feed sensor of printer does not detect
movement at the time of feeding the paper from the
the paper at the time of feeding the paper from option
corresponding paper feeder.
cassette.
ASF Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
FE Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor does not becoming the
movement at the time of feeding the paper from the
off condition at the time of the feeding the paper with
corresponding paper feeder.
specified step after the paper reaches to the feed sensor.
ASF2 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
FE2 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette
movement of option cassette (2nd) at the time of feeding the
(2nd) does not detect the paper at the time of feeding the
paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
paper from corresponding paper feeder.
ASF3 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
FE2 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (2nd)
movement of option cassette (3rd) at the time of feeding the
does not becoming the off condition at the time of feeding
paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
the paper with specified step after the paper reaches to the
feed sensor of option cassette(2nd). ASF4 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF
movement of option cassette (4th) at the time of feeding the
paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
Suspected cause The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3
Error name Error name
2nd ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000082) 2nd ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000081)
2nd ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000092) 2nd ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000083)
ASF3 PID excess speed error (error code: 000542) 2nd ASF PID lock error (error code: 000084)
ASF3 load position excess speed error (error code: 000552) 2nd ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000091)
ASF4 PID excess speed error (error code: 000562) 2nd ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000093)
ASF4 load position excess speed error (error code: 000572) ASF3 PID excess load error (error code: 000541)
Cause ASF3 PID reverse error (error code: 000543)
ASF3 PID lock error (error code: 000544)
State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
ASF3 load position excess load error (error code: 000551)
Suspected cause ASF3 load position reverse error (error code: 000553)
Additional ASF gear train detached or damaged ASF4 PID excess load error (error code: 000561)
Motor failure ASF4 PID reverse error (error code: 000563)
Main board failure ASF4 PID lock error (error code: 000564)
Troubleshooting ASF4 PID lock error (error code: 000565)
Step Check and measure Yes No
ASF4 PID lock error (error code: 000566)
1 Check the additional ASF gear Replace the Reassemble the Cause
train parts additional board additional ASF State in which load of additional ASF motor exceeds expected load
Has an additional ASF gear train part unit. gear train parts.
dropped off or become detached? (If the trouble is When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
not resolved, (There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
inquire at service direction in reaction to it)
support)
State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does
not rotate at all
State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does 3 Check the lift gear train parts Replace the Remove the
Check the ASF gear train parts to make additional main foreign object
not rotate at all
sure that there is no foreign object on them. board unit.
Suspected cause (If the trouble is
not resolved,
Paper incorrectly loaded or number of sheets loaded exceeds inquire at
maximum service support)
Foreign object in paper cassette
Damage to or foreign object trapped in additional lift gear train parts
Additional lift phase sensor failure
Additional lift motor failure
Additional main board failure
PE DETECTOR ERROR (ERROR CODE: 030001) PW SENSOR LIGHT VALUE ADJUST ERROR
(ERROR CODE:030002)
Cause
Cause
Occurs when PE detection can not be performed correctly due to failure
of PE sensor etc. Occurs when the paper presence can not be detected even if the maximum
light emission amount is increased in the adjustment of the light emission
Suspected cause amount.
PE sensor failure
Suspected cause
Main board failure
PW sensor failure
Troubleshooting
Main board failure
Step Check and measure Yes No Troubleshooting
1 Check the PE sensor cable connection state. Go to step2 Reassemble
Check that the PE sensor cable is properly Step Check and measure Yes No
connected. 1 Check the PW Sensor FFC connection state. Go to step2 Reassemble
2 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the Replace the Check that the PW sensor FFC is properly
Main Board. PE sensor. Main board. connected.
Replace main board with normal product and check 2 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the Replace the
operation. Main Board. PW sensor. Main board.
Did the error occur? Replace main board with normal product and check
operation.
Did the error occur?
EMERGENCY STOP ERROR CAUSED BY COVER OPENING TRANSISTOR TEMPERATURE ERROR (ERROR CODE: 031003)
(ERROR CODE: 030004)
Cause
Error name
Occurs if an FET of the main board or head drive circuit exceeds a set
Occurs if the rear cover is opened during motor driving. temperature.
(Although the fatal error occurrence history is recorded to the main unit,
the main unit display indicates a paper jam error) Suspected cause
Main board failure
Cause
Print head failure
Rear cover opened during motor driving
Troubleshooting
Rear cover open sensor failure
Troubleshooting Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Did the corresponding error occur Replace the following End
Step Check and measure Yes No after the power was turned off and parts in sequence
1 Turn the power off and then back on. Replace the End then back on? • Print Head
Did the corresponding error occur after the power rear cover Turn the power off and then leave the • Main Board
was turned off and then back on? Does an open open sensor. product for a while. Did the error occur (If the trouble is not
error occur while the rear cover is in the closed when the power was turned back on?
resolved, contact
state? service support.)
More than the maximum number of additional cassettes connected Unsupported additional cassette connected
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Install within the specified number of additional cassettes. Use supported additional cassettes.
CRCM FUSE BLOWN ERROR (ERROR CODE:033001) ASIC ACCESS ERROR (ERROR CODE: 033002)
Cause Cause
CRCM fuse is blown Occurs if the CS rank setting value is not supported.
Suspected cause Suspected cause
CRCM FFC inserted slanted PCD setting data is not set correctly or is damaged.
CRCM FFC failure Troubleshooting
Main board failure
Contact service support. (Rewriting of PCD data is required.)
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check the CRCM FFC connection state. Go to step 2 Reassemble
Check that the PE sensor cable is properly
connected.
2 Check the CRCM FFC state Replace the Replace the
Check the CRCM FFC state to make sure that the main board CRCM FFC
FFC is not damaged. (CRCM FFC connection part
has come off, FFC disconnected, etc.)
FATAL ERROR WHEN SENDING SC (ERROR CODE: 033004) CRCM RELATED FATAL ERROR
Cause Error name
Occurs if SC sending fails. Read parity error (error code: 033006)
Write parity error (error code: 033007)
Suspected cause
Cause
Main board failure (SOC abnormal operation on board)
Troubleshooting Communication error when reading/writing data from the CRCM
HOME POSITION SEEK ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034001) DEADLOCK AVOIDANCE IMPOSSIBLE (ERROR CODE: 034002)
Cause Cause
Occurs if the home position seek failed. Occurs when cannot return because state of the lock lever and CR
interference.
Suspected cause
Paper jam or foreign object (in CR operation area) Suspected cause
CR lock lever failure (Maintenance Unit failure) Paper jam or foreign object (in CR scanning area)
Maintenance Unit gear train damaged CR lock lever failure (Maintenance Unit failure)
Troubleshooting Maintenance Unit gear train damaged
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the Step Check and measure Yes No
Check that there is no paper jam or foreign object in jammed 1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the
the CR operation area. paper and Check that there is no paper jam or foreign object in jammed
foreign paper and
the CR operation area.
object foreign
2 Check the CR lock lever operation Contact Replace the object
Turn on the power and check that the CR lock lever service Maintenanc 2 Check the CR lock lever operation Contact Replace the
is operating. support. e Unit service Maintenanc
Turn on the power and check that the CR lock lever
is operating. support e Unit
IMPOSSIBLE CONTACT DETECTION ERROR (ERROR CODE: MOTOR RUNAWAY ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034010)
034003)
Cause
Cause
Occurs when state of motor being driven even though a voltage is not
Contact detection is not possible even when CR performs specified step applied to the motor.
movement.
Suspected cause
Suspected cause
Main board failure
Paper jam or foreign object (in CR operation area)
Troubleshooting
CR lock lever failure
Replace the main board
Main board failure
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the
Check that there is no paper jam or foreign jammed paper
object in the CR operation area. and foreign
object
2 Check the CR lock lever operation Replace the Replace the
Turn on the power and check that the CR main board Maintenance
lock lever is operating. (If the trouble is Unit
not resolved,
contact service
support.)
APG TARGET POSITION NOT REACHED ERROR SMAP PHASE DETECTION ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034012)
(ERROR CODE:034011)
Cause
Cause
Occurs if sensor detection was not possible when PF roller rotation phase
Even if the APG reset operation is performed, it occurs when the home can detection driving performed.
not be detected and the position becomes unknown
Suspected cause
Suspected cause
SMAP phase sensor failure
APG phase sensor failure Rotation member (flap) for detection damaged
Main board failure Main board failure
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No
Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check the APG phase sensor state Replace the Replace the
1 Check the rotation member (flap) Replace the following Repair
Perform the ”Individual action check main board APG phase for detection parts in sequence impossible
(A56 APG Sensor check)”, and check the sensor
Check that the rotation member • SMAP phase sensor (Contact
sensor state. (flap) for detection is not damaged. service
Is the sensor normal? • Main Board
support.)
(If the trouble is not
resolved, contact service
support.)
PW DETECTOR FAILURE ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034016) PW SENSOR DETECTED FOREIGN OBJECT ERROR
(ERROR CODE:034017)
Cause
Cause
Occurs when the output of the PW sensor is in a state lower than the
prescribed condition and reflected light can not be obtained as expected. Occurs when the output of the PW sensor is in a state lower than the
prescribed condition and reflected light can not be obtained as expected.
Suspected cause
Suspected cause
PW Shutter Solenoid failure
PW Shutter failure PW Shutter Solenoid failure
PW sensor failure PW Shutter failure
main board failure PW sensor failure
Dirt on reflection face of Platen. Main board failure
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No
Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check the reflection face of platen. Go to step 2 Clean the
1 Check the reflection face of platen. Go to step 2 Clean the
Check that dirt does not adhere to the reflection face
Check that dirt does not adhere to the reflection face
reflection face of platen. of platen.
reflection face of platen. of platen.
2 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 3 Replace the PW
2 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 3 Replace the PW
Solenoid Drive Shutter.
Solenoid Drive Shutter.
Perform “Individual action check (A30 PW
Perform “Individual action check (A30 PW
Sensor Shutter Solenoid)”, and check the
Sensor Shutter Solenoid)”, and check the
Solenoid State.
Solenoid State.
Is the Solenoid operation normal?
Is the Solenoid operation normal?
3 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 4 Replace the CR
3 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 4 Replace the CR
Perform “Individual action check (A55 PW Unit.
Perform “Individual action check (A55 PW Unit.
Sensor Check)”, and check the PW shutter
Sensor Check)”, and check the PW shutter
operation.
operation.
Is the PW Shutter operation is normal?
Is the PW Shutter operation is normal?
4 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the PW Replace the
4 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the PW Replace the
Main board Sensor. main board.
Main board Sensor. main board.
Replace the main board with normal
Replace the main board with normal
product and check operation.
product and check operation.
Did the error occur?
Did the error occur?
3RD NIP RELEASE SENSOR FAILURE ERROR MATCH ERROR BETWEEN MAIN ROM AND μSD ROM
(ERROR CODE: 034018) (PDL Program) (ERROR CODE:205604)
Cause Cause
Intermediate NIP Release sensor failure or Intermediate Release Solenoid Occurs when the firmware version of the main firmware and the μSD (PDL
failure. Program) do not match.
Suspected cause Suspected cause
Intermediate NIP Release sensor failure Firmware version of main firmware and the μSD (PDL Program) do
Intermediate Release Solenoid failure not match.
Main board failure Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Perform the firmware update, and matching the firmware version of the
Main firmware and μSD (PDL Program).
Step Check and measure Yes No
1 Check the Intermediate Release Solenoid Go to step 2 Replace the
and Intermediate NIP release sensor_1 Intermediate
Perform “Individual action check (A32 Nip release
Release Solenoid / Sensor)”. solenoid.
Did you hear of the solenoid operation
sound?
2 Check the Intermediate Release Solenoid Replace the End
and Intermediate NIP release sensor_2 Intermediate
Perform “Individual action check (A32 Nip NIP Release
Release Solenoid / Sensor). sensor.
Is the check result is not good? (If the trouble is
not resolved,
replace the main
board)
NOZZLES MISSING
Symptom
Nozzles missing
Cause
Nozzles clogged
Troubleshooting
Nozzle missing state matrix table How to view the nozzle missing state matrix table
Table 6-5. Nozzle Missing State Matrix Table 1. Check the cleaning history and nozzle missing state (rank). It can be
checked by remote monitoring or C20 Status Sheet Print (P. 785).
Cleaning history Nozzles missing state
(strongest 1 (E1) F (EF)
cleaning within 3 0 (E0) 2 (E2) 3 (E3)
Total of 5 6 or more
days, out of 5 No nozzles 3 to 32 33 nozzles
nozzles or nozzles
history items) missing nozzles or more
less failed
A None A-0* A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4
B CL/CL2 B-0* B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4
C CL3 C-0* C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4
D Head
Cleaning D-0* D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4
Strong Figure 6-4. Cleaning History
2. Check the place where the checked cleaning history and nozzle
Note: Even if there were no missing nozzles in “Nozzle Verification Technology” detection,
missing state (rank) intersect in the matrix table.
execute when there are print defects (cleaning is not necessary if there are not).
3. Refer to the item at the intersecting place and perform the
Resolution examples:
recommended measure.
A-0/1 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning CL1
Example) If the strongest cleaning within 3 days was Head Cleaning
A-2/3 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning CL2
CL2 and the nozzle rank was 02, the place of intersection is B-2 so
A-4, B-0 to B-4 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning CL3
execute the recommended Head Cleaning CL3.
C-0 to C-4 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning Strong
D-0 to D-4 : Recommend to perform judgment before head replacement
ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE
Symptom
Does not occur during printing (printing from a PC) and occurs only when
copying from the ADF or scanning glass.
Cause
Glass dirty
Scanning sensor dirty
Feed path roller dirty/deteriorated
Feed path foreign object/damaged
ADF Hinge damaged
ADF/SCN CIS module failure
Troubleshooting
SCN Unit
Check the contamination of the SCN glass surface.
[Measure] Clean the SCN glass surface.
Image defect 2 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after carrying out the measure, replace
Some or all of an image is not scanned [Measure] Clean the glass surface of the ADF/scanning glass. the ADF/SCN Unit.(p. 486)
2. Check the scanner cable connection.
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable correctly.
3. If the scanned document and size recognized on the printer side do
not match, replace the ADF/SCN Unit.
Image defect 3 Scanning (CIS sensor) + glass back side dirty? If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF/SCN
Light [Measure] Clean the corresponding parts. Unit.(p. 486)
Image defect 4 Check that the height of the ADF is appropriate in relation to the Replace the hinges (p. 486).
Image skewed on paper (only when ADF) scanning glass. If the ADF position is offset from the scanning glass even after
(Image skewed only when copying) Check that the ADF is attached parallel to the scanning glass. replacing the hinges, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 486).
Image defect 5 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after carrying out the measure, replace
Image defects other than the above that occur [Measure] Clean the ADF/SCN glass surface. the ADF/SCN Unit.(p. 486)
only when copying 2. Check the scanner cable connection.
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable correctly.
Feed defect 1 Clean the ADF Pickup Roller Assy/ADF Pad. If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF Pickup
Double Feeding Roller Assy and ADF Pad.(p. 505)
(If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF Pickup Roller
and ADF Pad, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 486))
Feed defect 2 Check that there is no foreign object or damage in the ADF feed path. If a part is found to be damaged, etc. after cleaning the path, replace the
Document bending corresponding part or ADF/SCN Unit.(p. 486)
Feed defect 3 Check that the ADF is closed correctly. Replace the ADF/SCN Unit.(p. 486)
Paper jam occurs when feeding from the ADF Check that the height of the ADF is appropriate.
Clean the ADF feed path.
Clean the feed roller surfaces.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step Check and Measure YES No
Check the paper Go to step 2 Change the paper to suitable paper.
1 Check that suitable paper (1. paper is not printed. 2. paper don't have punch holes,
etc.) is being used.
Check the settings Go to step 3 Change the settings
Main unit settings: Check that the paper settings and automatic size detection settings
2 of the main unit are appropriate. If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 3.
Driver: Check that a value other than 0 is not input for the offset in the extended
settings.
Check the feed rollers Go to step 4 Cleaning the feed roller.
3
Check that the contamination and damage are not attached to the feed roller. Replace the feed rollers
Check the PE sensor lever Go to step 5 Replace the PE sensor lever
Check that the state and movement of the PE sensor lever are normal.
4
(Perform the following item from service support mode)
B23 PE Sensor Check (p. 260)
Check the PE sensor adjustment value Go to step 6 Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment
Check that the PE sensor process adjustment value is appropriate. pattern
5 (Perform the following items from service support mode)
1. B52 PE Adjust FASF (p. 264)
2. B53 PE Adjust RASF (p. 264)
Check the PW sensor adjustment value Contact service support If trouble is occurred in “1”,”2”
Check that the PW sensor process adjustment value is appropriate. Replace the PW sensor
(Perform the following items from service support mode) In the “3”
6 select and enter an appropriate value from the
1. A55 PW Sensor Shutter Check (p. 196)
adjustment pattern
2. A30 PW Sensor shutter Solenoid (p. 194)
3. B49 PW Sensor Correct (p. 263)
PRINT SMUDGES
Symptom
Unexpected smudges can be seen somewhere (including back side) on
printouts.
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check whether printing or copying Occurs with printing and copying. Occurs with copying only
1
Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. Go to step 2 Refer to ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE (→P. 157).
Check whether both or only duplex
If occurs with both. If occurs only with duplex
2 Check whether or not occurs only when duplex printing or occurs regardless of whether
Go to step3 Check/clean/replace the duplex unit.
duplex printing or single-sided printing.
Confirm the contamination adherence. Go to step 4 Clean the corresponding parts.
Check inside the product * When cleaning the gaps in the SMAP driven roller, you
Check that there is no noticeable dirt inside the product. can raise the driven roller a little to make cleaning easier by
executing
Check the platen
Check that there is no noticeable dirt on the platen. [Settings] > [Printer Cleaning] > [Remove Scraps of
Paper].
Check the feed path (roller surfaces)
If there are smudges at the center of the paper, check the various feed rollers.
3 * If there are large ink deposits, check that there is no ink
CR side surface leaking.
Check that there is no dust or ink adhered.
If there is noticeable dirt on the platen, operation without
paper may have occurred so execute cleaning and check the
following items as well.
1. Paper size setting of main unit / driver
2. Check the PW sensor operation (refer to step 7 below)
Check the paper and settings Go to Step 5 Change the paper or settings.
Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling). Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
4
Check whether or not the paper settings are appropriate.
If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 5.
COLOR DEVIATION
Symptom
Colors are completely different (1)
Another color is mixed creating a gradation (2)
Color is slightly different (3)
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check the conditions
Check that any conditions below the lowest limits are the same when comparing colors in When the conditions differ
two or more different printouts. The cause is highly likely to be not a failure but one of the
When conditions are the same
1 Light source of comparison location, printer, paper, print settings, and print date and following.
Go to Step 2
time Different light source, color gamut unique to device, paper,
Paper type: [Basic Settings] > [Paper Type] ink density, aging variation
Ink density: [Utilities] > [Extended Settings] > [Print Density].
Check whether printing or copying Occurs with printing and copying. Occurs with copying only
2
Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. Go to step 3 Refer to ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE (→P. 157).
Check the paper Go to step 4 Print on appropriate paper.
3 1. Check whether or not the front and back sides of the paper match.
2. Check whether or not the result is the same even when printing on plain paper.
Check the settings Go to step 5 • Update the firmware.
4 1. Check whether or not the firmware is the latest version. • Change the settings
2. Check that the paper settings are appropriate.
Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 6 Nozzles missing in several places
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. • Nozzles missing rank
Nozzle condition is excellent? • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from the
service status sheet (p. 785) and execute head cleaning
5 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. according to the nozzle missing state check matrix table.
Normal menu (User Menu)
If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles Missing
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] (→P. 154).
Service Support Mode
If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 6.
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 261)
Blank paper
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check the operation when blank pages are ejected (point: whether blank pages
ejected or blank pages printed) Begins print operation
Does not begin print operation (CR does not move)
1 (CR moves)
Check whether the machine begins the print operation (CR moves right and left Go to step 2
Go to step 6
multiple times) or not.
Check the paper Go to step 3
Check whether or not using paper that is thick such as paper that has already been Change the paper.
2
printed on. Set the edge guide of paper cassette correctly.
Check whether or not the paper size and edge guide position are appropriate.
Check the settings Go to step 4 Change the settings
3 Check whether or not the paper settings of the main unit and driver are appropriate.
Check whether or not blank paper parts are included in the print data.
Check the network. Go to step 5 If printing wirelessly, check whether prints with a wired
If the data does not arrive for 5 or more minutes after the print command, connection.
4
blank paper is ejected due to a timeout error.
Check whether or not blank print is occur by internal printing (status sheet, etc.).
Check the feed/retard rollers. Go to step 6 If the rollers are not attached appropriately, reattach them.
5 Check whether or not the feed/retard rollers are attached correctly Replace the rollers if necessary when damaged or the symptom
and whether or not the surfaces are dirty. is not resolved by cleaning the surfaces.
Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 7 Nozzles missing in several places
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. • Nozzles missing rank
Nozzle condition is excellent? • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from the service
status sheet (p. 785) and execute head cleaning according
6 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. to the nozzle missing state check matrix table.
Normal menu (User Menu)
If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles Missing
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check]
(→P. 154).
Service Support Mode If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 7.
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 261)
Check the main board. Go to step 8 Replace the main board (p. 546).
7 Check that there is continuity of the head circuit fuses (F700 and F701) on the main
board.
Check the head FFC. Go to step 9 Replace the head FFC (p. 534).
8
Visually check the FFC terminals to make sure they are not bent up or damaged.
Replace the print head Replace the print head (p. 616).
9
If the symptom is not resolved even after performing the steps above, replace the head.
STACKABILITY POOR
Symptom
Paper is output with the leading edge curled.
Alignment property of paper is poor, and varies vertically and
horizontally.
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check the stacker position Go to step 2 Reattach the stacker correctly.
1
Check that the stacker is attached correctly.
Check the paper Go to step 3 Explain that the cause is due to external factors and advise the
• Check that the paper is within the specifications (64 g/m2 or more). customer to change the paper/environment.
2 • Check that the paper is long grain. Or go to step 4
• Check that the paper is stored appropriately.
• Check that the operating environment is appropriate.
Check the settings Go to step 4 1. Correct the settings.
3 • Check whether or not the paper settings of the driver and main unit are appropriate. 2. Lower the print density.
• Check whether or not the print density is appropriate.
Check the output guide position Go to step 5 Change the output guide height with the output guide lever.
4 Check whether or not the output guides are raised for the paper for which stackability is
poor.
Output tray Contact service Clean if dirty.
5 Check whether or not the output tray/guide is dirty or damaged support If scratched, damaged, etc, replace the output tray if necessary
(p. 378).
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check the paper Go to step 2 Print using standard paper.
1
Check that the paper surface is flat.
Check the settings Go to step 3 Correct the settings.
2 • Check that the paper settings are appropriate.
If the print quality setting is set to give priority to speed,
• Check that the print quality setting is set to standard or to give priority to quality.
change it to standard or to give priority to quality.
Check the CR scale Go to step 4 Replace the CR scale (p. 630).
Visually check the CR scale to confirm that it is not dirty or damaged.
3
(Perform the following item from service support mode)
• B21 CR Scale Check (p. 260)
Check the CR operation Go to step 5 Clean and apply grease if necessary.
Execute “CR Unlock Power Off2” of the service support mode to release the CR.
1. Move the CR left and right while holding the belt and check that it moves
4 smoothly.
2. Check that there is no foreign mater on or damage to the CR shaft, CR guide
frames, and CR ribs.
3. Check that the CR belt is not damaged or worn out.
Check the Bi-D Adjustment value Go to step 6 Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment pattern
Print adjustment patterns and check that the adjustment values are not deviated.
(Perform the following items from service support mode)
When lines are offset overall
5 1. B46 Bi-D Adjust
2. B48 Bi-D Band Adjust
When the center of the image is correct but both edges of the image (width of about
10 mm) are offset (image 2) even after performing the above
1. B45 PTS Acc And Dec. Adjust
Check the Head Angular Adjustment Mech value Go to step 7 1. Refer to the print patterns and perform CR angular
(Perform the following item from service support mode) adjustment.
1. Execute [B43 Head Angular Adjustment Mech] and adjust the CR angular while 2. Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment pattern
6
viewing the printed patterns.
2. After CR mechanism adjustment is completed, execute [B44 Head Angular
Adjustment Soft] and adjust the remaining difference.
Check the PG Contact to service perform the PG Adjustment (p. 259)
7 Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value support.
range (1.35 ±0.05 mm).
Cause
Environment
Paper
Feed path foreign object
Flap failure
EJ holder
PG value abnormal
Ink density excessive
etc.
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check the operating environment Go to step 2 Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
1
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
Check the paper Go to step 3 Use suitable paper.
• Check that there is no damage to the paper before it pases through. Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
• Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling). *: If the symptom continues even after using the rubbing
2
• Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing). avoidance mode, refer to the avoidance measures.
*: When, for example, A4 paper is used cut to A5 size, the long grain becomes the
short grain so there is a tendency for edges to bend easily.
Check the feed path Go to step 4 Remove the foreign object and then clean.
• Check that there is no damage to or foreign object on the feed path. If flap damaged or abnormal, contact the service support
3
• Check that the movement of the flap is smooth (returns to original position due to
its own weight after being pushed).
Check the points for if bent when duplex printing Go to step 5 Clean the driven roller.
If bent when duplex printing, compare the conditions with those in the points table. * You can raise the driven roller a little to make cleaning easier
4
by executing [Settings] > [Printer Cleaning] > [Remove Scraps
of Paper].
Check the EJ holder Go to step 6 Replace the Star Wheel Assy.
Check that the jagged part of the EJ holder rotates normally.
Check that there are no cuts or other damage locally on the EJ roller surface.
5 Execute the following while looking at the EJ holder/roller from the front when the
output tray has been removed.
(Perform the following item from service support mode)
• A11 PF Motor/SMAP Sensor
Check the PG Contact Service Peform the PG Adjustment(p. 259).
6 Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value support.
range (1.35 ±0.05 mm).
If the symptom continues even in the rubbing avoidance mode
1. Reduce the print density (default is -20 for duplex, but -5 or -10 from that).
Avoidance
2. Increase the drying time.
measures
3. Make sure that a high density image does not come at the trailing edge of the first
side (rotate, change the print order, etc.).
DOUBLE FEEDING
Symptom
Multiple paper sheets are output at the same time.
Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No
Check the operating environment Go to step 2 Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
1
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
Check the paper Go to step 3 Use suitable paper.
• Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing, paper).
2
• Check that the paper guide positions are appropriate.
• Check that the paper edges are aligned in the cassette.
Check the settings Go to step 4 Change the settings
3
Check that the paper setting size and actual paper size match.
Check the retard unit Contact Service Replace the retard roller (p. 757).
• Check that the retard roller is attached appropriately (tabs and locked) and not worn support.
4
out.
• Rotate the retard roller and check that there is a load.
Lift motor
(Paper cassette (C1)) Lift motor
(Paper cassette (2))
ASF motor
(rear ASF / paper cassette (C1)) ASF motor
(Paper cassette (2))
Troubleshooting
Timing of
abnormal Category Frequency How to check Measure
sound
Hopper system operation Always when cassette Perform the following items from “Individual • Apply grease to gear shaft part on cassette side.
sound? removed and inserted Action Check” of service support mode. • Replace lift motor Assy.
A17 Lift Motor/ Lift Phase Sensor(1st)
A18 Lift Motor/ Lift Phase Sensor(2nd)
A19 Lift Motor/ Lift Phase Sensor(3rd)
A20 Lift Motor/ Lift Phase Sensor(4th)
Rear ASF system Always temporarily when Perform the following items from “Individual • Replace the ASF Drive Assy. (p. 716).
rear feeding Action Check” of service support mode. • Replace the Rear ASF Unit. (p. 708).
A13 ASF Motor(1st)
A31 RASF Solenoid
ASF motor related (When printing first sheet) Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the ASF Drive Assy. (p. 716).
Before Action Check” of service support mode.
printing A13 ASF Motor (1st)
A14 ASF Motor(2nd)
A15 ASF Motor(3rd)
A16 ASF Motor(4th)
APG Immediately before printing Perform the following item from “Individual Action • Check the state of the APG gear train gears (no broken teeth, etc.)
Check” of service support mode. • Replace the APG Drive Assy. (p. 602).
A12 APG Move Check *: Gear box is on the left of the back side.
*: Take care that there is no phase shift when removing and attaching the
gear box.
Retard Roller Immediately before printing Visually check the retard roller shape Replace the retard roller.(p. 716).
(no uneven wear, etc.). *: If the retard roller becomes unevenly worn, the friction coefficient will
decrease and the roller will not rotate.
Timing of
abnormal Category Frequency How to check Measure
sound
CR system CR operation Perform the following item from “Individual Action • When sound is output by moving the CR:
Check” of service support mode. Check whether there is a foreign object, and if there is, remove it.
A10 CR Motor Clean the CR rib, shaft, and guide frame and then apply grease to them.
• When sound is always output when CR is reversed:
Check whether there is a foreign object, and if there is, remove it.
Check that the CR belt tension is appropriate.
Check that fixing of the CR motor is appropriate.
PF system Always when printing Perform the following item from “Individual Action Abnormal sound from left side of main unit
Check” of service support mode. • Insufficient grease on SMAP roller or EJ roller ground contact point:
A11 PF Motor Apply grease.
• Check that the PF timing belt tension is appropriate.
• Check that a rattling sound is not output at the gear fixing E-ring.
If there is rattling, change the orientation.
• Teeth knocking due to gear backlash:
Apply grease to the idler gear shaft.
Abnormal sound from right side of main unit
During • Abnormal sound from PF gear train gears:
printing Check the state of the gears (whether or not tilted, etc.). If problem,
reattach or replace them.
• When driving that is supposed to be off is connected:
Check that movement of the maintenance unit is smooth.
*: If necessary, replace the corresponding part.
NIP Release Solenoid Temporarily always only Perform the following item from “Individual Action Check that the solenoid is fixed appropriately.
when feeding (single sound) Check” of service support mode. If necessary, replace the NIP release solenoid.(p. 734).
A32 Nip Release Solenoid *: This part is not installed in Hopkins and is installed only in Hopkins 2,
so in the case of changing models from the previous model, note that
this may not be a failure but may have been pointed out because a
change in the operation sound was noticed.
ASF motor related (When print multiple sheets) Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the ASF Drive Assy.(p. 716).
Action Check” of service support mode.
A13 ASF Motor (1st)
A14 ASF Motor(2nd)
A15 ASF Motor(3rd)
A16 ASF Motor(4th)
Timing of
abnormal Category Frequency How to check Measure
sound
NIP release solenoid Temporarily always only Perform the following item from “Individual Action • Check that the solenoid is fixed appropriately.
when feeding (single sound) Check” of service support mode. • If necessary, replace the NIP release solenoid.(p. 734).
A32 Nip Release Solenoid *: This part is not installed in Hopkins and is installed only in Hopkins 2,
so in the case of changing models from the previous model, note that
this may not be a failure but may have been pointed out because a
Between change in the operation sound was noticed.
pages ASF motor related (When print multiple sheets) Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the ASF Drive Assy.(p. 716).
Action Check” of service support mode.
A13 ASF Motor (1st)
A14 ASF Motor(2nd)
A15 ASF Motor(3rd)
A16 ASF Motor(4th)
PF system When CL suction Perform the following items from service support • Check the pump operation sound immediately after executing cleaning.
When not
mode. • If necessary, replace the Maintenance Unit
printing
C03 CL1
When IS system Every time when cover Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the supply pump.(p. 559).
RIPS and closed Action Check” of service support mode.
front cover A21 Supply Pump Motor0
closed A22 Supply Pump Motor1
Hopper up/down sensor C1_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper up/down sensor (paper cassette (1)) cannot detect correctly in Main unit cassette
error the feed/eject check or cassette hopper operation check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
Main unit hopper lifting
C2_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper up/down sensor (paper cassette (2)) cannot detect correctly in Additional cassette
the feed/eject check or cassette hopper operation check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
Additional hopper lifting
C3_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper up/down sensor (paper cassette (3)) cannot detect correctly in Additional cassette
the feed/eject check or cassette hopper operation check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
Additional hopper lifting
C4_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper up/down sensor (paper cassette (4)) cannot detect correctly in Additional cassette
the feed/eject check or cassette hopper operation check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
Additional hopper lifting
C3_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper Additional cassette
cassette (3). Feed to eject check (single/double)
C4_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper Additional cassette
cassette (4). Feed to eject check (single/double)
Cassette pull out Pull_Out_The Displayed when the paper cassette is inserted when performing the lift motor/lift phase Lift motor/lift phase sensor operation
instruction Cassette sensor operation check. check
How to check
Select a check item from the list to execute the check. (Input system Individual Action Check - Input A_Number Cancel
parts and output system parts)
INPUT A-XX 2 Digit Number. 1 2 3
1. Select “Output: MENU (output system parts)” or “Input: MENU (input If wrong, return this screen.
4 5 6 C
system parts)” from the individual action check mode menu screen.
2. Select the target check items from the corresponding menu to execute INPUT Number: Push [#]
- 7 8 9
Back Menu: Push [*]
the checks.
0 OK
Individual Action Check - Output Individual Action Check
Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] Back:[*] Run:[#] Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] Back:[*] Run:[#]
Individual Action Check - Input Program No. Input Screen
A10 CR Motor A40 ALL Sensor Check
A_Number Menu Screen
A11 PF Motor/SMAP Sensor Check - Feed/Eject : MENU
A12 APG Move Check Sensor Check - Feed/Eject : MENU Figure 6-19. Service Support Mode Screens
ASF Motor:MENU A55 PW Sensor Sutter Check
Lift Motor / Lift Phase Sensor :MENU A56 APG Sensor Check
A21 Supply Pump Motor 0 A57 Temp. and hum. Sensor Check
A22 Supply Pump Motor 1 A58 Ink End Sensor
A30 PW Sensor Shutter Solenoid
A31 RASF Solenoid
A32 Nip Release Solenoid / Sensor
Output Procedure
Manual [FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Report] ⇒ [FAX Log] = Select [Print]
[Setup] ⇒ [General Setting] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Report Settings]
Auto ⇒ [FAX Log Auto Print]
= [Off] / [On (Every 30)] / [On (Time)]
Output Settings
[Setup] ⇒ [General Setting] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Report Settings]
Report Format
⇒ [Report Format] = [Simple] / [Detail]
Output Setting
Use FAX parameter setting mode #005 to save and print error
Save / Print
communication only.
error only
See ”Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #007 to save one log/ save three log/
Auto print the Protocol trace.
See “Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
Viewpoint of DIS(DTS)/DCS
Before starting communication, faxes communicate their own functions on
the sending side and the receiving side, and then determine the
communication function and speed.
The receiving side fax machine transmits its own function to the sending
side fax machine by the DIS signal.
The sending fax machine receives the DIS signal from the receiving fax
machine and can use the information on the sending side and the receiving
side.
After selecting the maximum function set by the transmission side, you can
check the communication mode selected by the DCS signal
By checking the information of DIS (DTC), the contents of the capability
of the receiving side fax can check the communication mode selected by
the sending side fax by checking the information of the DCS.
The protocol monitor log is recorded and printed on only one sheet by one
communication.
If the protocol becomes long due to communication of a plurality of pages
and it does not fit on one page, the head protocol log is deleted and only the
last protocol log is recorded and printed.
Fax communications are created according to ITU, and the main ITUs
involved are T30. and T4.
DIS (DTC) DCS reads out the content of FIF (facsimile information field)
by referring to the bit allocation table of DIS (DTC) / DCS.
408 Failure Received a RTN. TX D 459 Failure Training error occurs when RX C
202 202 receiving PIX.
409 Failure Received a PIN. TX D 490 Failure Number of error line exceeds the RX C
202 202 limit value when receiving PIX.
410 Failure Received a DCN during receiving RX D 494 Failure (Modem): Timeout during EOL RX C
202 phase D. 202
411 Failure Received a DCN after sending RX B 495 Failure Carrier disconnection during RX C
202 DTC. (POL) 202 receiving phase D
412 Failure Cannot receive DSN after sending RX B 496 Failure (Modem): Data sending start error TX B,C
202 FTT. 202
414 Failure No response after sending DTC. RX B 501 Failure (V.34) Modem inconsistency error V.34 B
202 (POL) 202 RX/TX
415 Failure No document for polling sending. TX B 502 Failure (V.34) Primary channel end error V.34 C
202 (POL) 202 RX/TX
416 Failure Cannot receive Postcommand RX D 503 Failure (V.34) Control channel end error V.34 B,C,D
202 202 RX/TX
417 Failure Sent RTN RX D 504 Failure (V.34) Polling sending request is RX B
202 202 rejected in step V.8 (POL)
420 Failure T1 timer timeout RX B 505 Failure (V.34) Rejected the polling sending TX B
202 202 request in step V.8 (POL)
422 Failure Settings of DIS/DTC are disabled. TX B 540 Failure (ECM) No response or received a TX D
202 202 DCN after sending CTC
427 Failure Received a DCN after sending DIS RX B 541 Failure (ECM) No response or received a TX D
202 202 DCN after sending EOR
433 Failure (Modem): Frame length error RX/TX B,D 542 Failure (ECM) No response or received a TX D
202 202 DCN after sending RR
434 Failure (Modem): Frame wait timeout RX/TX B,D 543 Failure (ECM) T5 timer timeout TX D
202 202
436 Failure Received a DCN after sending CFR/ RX C 544 Failure (ECM) Sent DCN after sending TX D
202 FTT 202 EOR.
438 Failure A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/TX B 550 Failure (ECM) (Modem): Timeout between RX C
202 DTC. (POL) 202 frames
Error Code
Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
communication Job history
report
6.4.4 FAX Service Parameter Make sure not to change the parameter before identifying
To support by country or trouble, this product is equipped with the service the phenomenon and cause of the trouble.
parameters in addition to user mode parameters. Make sure to identify the phenomenon and cause of the trouble
before changing the parameter. Otherwise, the essential trouble may
Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode” from the special mode to change settings be hidden that result in recurrence the trouble or cause of another
with the service parameters. problem.
According to the explanation in 6.7.6.1 Basics of FAX
troubleshooting (p.281), perform in the following procedure.
6.4.4.1 Outline of setting change in FAX Maintenance Mode
• Step1: Check the symptom
The following shows the procedure for settings change in FAX Maintenance • Step2: Identify the cause
Mode. • Step3: Correction
1. Enter “FAX Parameter Mode”. When the identification of the cause is difficult, check the symptom
as accurately as possible to acquire setting information of the
2. Start “FAX Parameter Settings”. product, then inquire at support center.
3. Select the item to be changed, then input the value.
Initialize the FAX Service Parameter Setting
4. Press the [Power] button to turn off the power. When you want to initialize the FAX Service parameter only,
[FAX Parameter Mode] → Select [FAX All Data Initial].
6.4.4.2 Parameter changing procedure 1-3.Push the [#]button after input the ID number, and confirm that
following screen is displayed on panel LCD.
1. Star the “FAX Maintenance Mode”.
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]]
1-1.From Power Off Condition, push the [#] button and [Power] button SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#]
until the message is displayed on Panel LCD.
*****
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]]
SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#] OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT
_
Operation method
1. FAX Support Mode
• Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
• Number input (move in descending order) : [8] button
• Input digit shift : [6] button
• Execute : [#] button
_
1. FAX Support Mode
2. FAX Maintenance Mode
2. Start the “FAX Parameter Settings” 3. Select the changing item, and enter the setting number.
2-1. Select the “FAX Parameter Setting”, and push [#] button. Enter the number of changing item (3 digit), and push the [#] button.
FAX Maintenance Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8] C H E C K If “---” is displayed on the right side of the number of
P O IN T changing number (3 digit), it is an item with no
parameter assignment.
1. Line Measurement Mode
2. FAX Parameter Settings There are the following two types of setting change
items, and the changing method is different.
• Parameter of selection type :Select Setting value
• Parameter of input type : Enter Setting value
Please Wait
[000]
000 PARAMLIST PRINT
001 RAMEDIT PRINT
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT
007PTCL LOG MULTI SAVE
008 ---
009 ---
Example of setting change in selection type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
Initial setting value of “DIAL TONE DETECT” is changing from [On] when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
to [Off] condition. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number(060), and push the [#]button.
off the printer.
FAX Parameter Setting
FAX Parameter Setting
Input number [060]
060 DIAL TONE DETECT 060 DIAL TONE DETECT
Value after Current: Off
061 DT DET TIME
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME change
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX)
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME
065 ---
066 --- Parameter is set
067 ---
068 --- Back to Parameter List: [#]
069 --- Finish: [Power]
Example of setting change in input type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
Initial setting value of “TX SIGNAL LEVEL” is changing from when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
[-10dBm] to [-15dBm]. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number, and push the [#]button.
off the printer.
FAX Parameter Setting
FAX Parameter Setting
Input number [120] 120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL Value after Current: 15[-dBm]
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL change
122 TX EQUALIZER
123 RX EQUALIZE
124 ---
125 --- Parameter is set
126 ---
127 ---
128 --- Back to Parameter List:[#]
129 --- Finish: [Power]
6.4.5 Fax related user special parameters. 6.4.5.1 Emergency ejection of fax reception document (FAX to PC)
In this product, special parameters are prepared for the following users. Using the PC FAX reception function, urgently remove the received original
document file (.PDF) that can not be printed.
FAX to PC Emergency ejection of received fax document PC fax reception can be taken out by both USB / network.
FAX to Memory When a facsimile received document becomes unprintable due to a The original file of fax reception is deleted from the product after transfer.
malfunction of the printer function, the fax reception original file
can be urgently taken out.
FAX to PC Work Procedure
Install FAX Utility on a PC connected to the product via USB or
network, and take out fax received original file using PC - FAX 1. Start “User Special Mode”.
reception function. 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
FAX to Memory press and hold the power switch.
Remove the FAX received document to the USB external Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
memory connected to the product.
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate "User Special Mode".
2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select "FAX to PC" from the menu and press
the [#] button to execute.
User Special Mode
Run: [#] / Select:[2][8]
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory
3. When the following screen is displayed, execute setting of PC FAX 6.4.5.2 Emergency ejection of received fax documents
reception from PC with USB or network connection with product. (FAX to Memory)
Using the USB memory, urgently remove fax received original file (.PDF) that can not
FAX to PC
be printed.
The received fax document file is transferred to the "¥ EPFAX RCV" folder
Change save mode from PC.
of the USB memory. (Folders are automatically generated)
The fax receiving document is deleted from the product after transfer.
Work Procedure
4. After PC FAX reception setting is completed, "Ready" is displayed and
transfer is started. 1. Start “User Special mode”.
FAX to PC 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
press and hold the power switch.
Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
Ready
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate "User Special Mode".
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory
3. When the following message is displayed on the screen, connect the USB 6. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed on the
memory to the product. screen.
Press the "Power" button to turn off the product.
FAX to Memory
FAX to Memory
Insert a Memory Card.
Completed, Push [Power]
FAX to Memory
Storing
6.4.6.1 Fax troubleshooting basics Step 1: Accurately understand and identify trouble symptoms.
In this step we check 5 points.
To troubleshoot fax troubleshooting with the following steps.
1. What is the symptom of the trouble?
Troubleshooting basic step Who is reporting the trouble?
(User, administrator, communication partner of the printer)
Step 1: Accurately grasp and identify trouble symptoms.
What kind of error code / error message are occurring?
Step 2: Investigate the trouble error and specify the cause. (Communication management report, job history, protocol monitor log)
Step 3: Correct the problem. What kind of trouble is occurring?
(Please understand concretely that you can not transmit, can not receive, can not
send and receive, or the received image is dirty)
Example) Can not sending
In particular, step 1 is very important. → I can dial, but it can not connect with the other party.
Communication is started with the other party but communication
Fax related troubles occur not only in the trouble caused by the own machine,
error occurs.
but also due to troubles caused by the partner machine, troubles caused by the Communication is possible but the image is dirty
telephone line, troubles caused by usage, and the like occur in a combined 2. Where is the trouble occurring?
manner. Occurred in printer, occurred in application, occurred in specific PC.
When trouble occurs, hear the customer trouble content / situation well Printer / PC of customer site, printer of customer office, equipment of customer's
communication partner.
"Who is in trouble with what?" 3. When will the trouble occur?
"What is in trouble?" When has it occurred?
"How can you satisfy our customers?" Is it occurring at a specific time?
Frequency of occurrence (always occurring, about once in 10 times).
Accurately understanding and identify. Before trouble occurrence of environment.
Thereafter, step 2 is performed, and the process proceeds to step 3. Has the environment changed before the problem occurred?
If troubleshooting in step 3 is skipped by skipping steps 1 and 2, the original (Firm update, replacing ink cartridge, changed telephone line, moved the
installation location)
trouble will not be known.
4. What kind of operations and conditions will cause trouble?
As a result, it may cause trouble recurrence and another trouble to be induced. When trouble occurs, is it always the same operation?
Does the problem occur only when a specific event occurs?
Does the same problem occur with another device or another destination
communication?
5. Can you reproduce the trouble?
Has the same trouble occurred also at the service base?
Does the same problem occur with multiple devices and users?
Can the trouble be reproduced by a specific operation or a specific opponent?
6.4.6.2 Equipment information necessary for fax trouble report. Report /Log name Remark Print Procedure
If it is difficult to identify the cause of the problem, contact the smart charge Consumables “Setup” → “Printing main body
center for the following information. information sheet status sheet” → “Consumables
information sheet”
Symptom report of trouble Usage history sheet “Setup” → “Printing main body
(6.4.6.1 Fax troubleshooting basics by referring to basic step 1 of fax status sheet” → “Specification
troubleshooting.) history sheet”
Epson status sheet Network status sheet “Setup” → “Network
Device setting information information” → “Check network
(Please see below for contents.) information” → “Print”
Report /Log name Remark Print Procedure Sending document, Communication time is
sample of received slow, picture quality is
Fax function setting list “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” → document bad, etc
“Print” → “FAX function setting
list”
Communication Print with report type = “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” →
management report “detailed information”. “Print” → “Communication
When symptoms rarely management report".
occur, automatically Report format
print and acquire “Setup” → “System
multiple sheets. administration setting” → “Fax
setting” → “Output setting” →
“Report format” → “Detailed
information”.
Auto print
“Setup” → “System
administration setting” → “Fax
setting” → “Output setting” →
“Communication management
report automatic printing”→
"On (every 30 items)"
Protocol log Logs that are “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” →
experiencing trouble “Print” → “Protocol log”
symptomatic errors are
preferred.
Printer information sheet “Setup” → “Printing main body
status sheet” → “Printer
information sheet”
6.4.6.3 Troubleshooting from fax function diagnosis Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure
By conducting fax function diagnosis for diagnosis of trouble, it is possible to The modular cable is When the modem on Make sure that the modular cable
diagnose basic items of fax function, line connection. connected to the EXT hook of the from the telephone line jack is
port. equipment, the voltage connected to the LINE and the
When an error is displayed in the fax function diagnosis report, the following of the LINE port was module cable from the external
the method are implemented. the specified value, telephone (if connected) is
but if it is set to the off connected to the EXT.
hook, it becomes less → If the external telephone is
Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure than the specified connected to the telephone line in
An error was found in Main base, fax based As hardware defects are considered, voltage value of the reverse, correctly connect it again.
the printer. communication repair or product exchange (initial LINE port port.
problem failure) is carried out. (When multiple
modems are on hook,
It is not properly When the modem on Confirm that the telephone line jack
the EXT port is
connected to the hook of the and the LINE port of the equipment
disconnected.)
telephone line. equipment, the voltage are properly connected with the
of the LINE port was modular cable. Line connection is The on-hook phone When a splitter is connected, in case
less than the specified → The stuffing of the modular cable unstable. was measured and it of separation, connect the telephone
value. is broken. was below the line and the device directly and re-
If contact failure or disconnection, specified value. connect the fax function.
exchange cable. If it is connected to the TA, check if
Calculate the line voltage with a it improves by restarting TA.
tester. No dial tone is can not detect the dial If you hear sound and intermittent
(DC 48V at normal time) detected. tone. sound by pressing the "on hook"
Connect the external telephone to button, set the connection line to
the telephone line jack without "private branch exchange (PBX)"
going through the device and check and perform the diagnostic test
whether telephone reaction, again.
incoming call, and call can be made You hear a continuous tone sound
normally. by pressing the “On Hook” button,
→ If there is an abnormality in the but set “Dial tone detection” to
telephone line, ask the telephone “OFF” when the tone is small.
line contractor for confirmation.
6.4.6.4 Troubleshooting from error code Error code display Judgment contents Measure
The trouble can be specified to some extent by the error code of the No circuit connection No line voltage from before Make sure that the
communication management report. transmission telephone line is properly
connected to the LINE port.
Connect the phone and
C H E C K In order to display the error code in the communication
check if you can dial by
P O IN T management report, it is necessary to make the following dialing or dialing a dial
setting. tone.
Check the line voltage with
[Setup] → [System administration settings] → [Fax
a tester.
settings] → [Output settings] → [Report format] (48 V DC at on-hook)
= [Detailed information]
Busy Busy tone is detected when Check if the phone number
dialing is wrong.
Phase A trouble (calling system)
Check whether another
Error code display Judgment contents Measure signal is erroneously
detected as a busy tone.
No tone Dial tone can not be detected Connect the phone and In case of erroneous
when dialing. check whether the dial tone detection Confirm the signal
from the switchboard is that is erroneously detected
heard, continuous tone or by recording, and set the
intermittent tone. busy tone detection function
Check if it is PSTN line or to "OFF" in [FAX
PBX line. Maintenance Mode].
In case of PBX line, change Or adjust the detection
connection line setting to method.
PBX and check again.
No reply I can not detect the fax number Make sure that the phone
If you can hear the dial tone
from the other machine after number is wrong.
but can not detect it , record
dialing. Confirm that the fax signal
it and check the signal and
adjust the detection method is coming back from the
in [FAX Maintenance other party.
Mode].
At this time, the [OFF]
setting of dial tone detection
has a risk of false detection.
Avoid as much as possible.
Port back push Before calling (on hook) there Check whether the LINE
was a line voltage but the line port and the EXT port are
voltage was gone when calling connected in reverse or
(off hook). check the telephone
connection
Phase B to D trouble
Error code display Judgment contents Measure
Error ××× A communication error Output the communication
occurred after line connection. management report and
check the error occurrence
status.
In a fax machine that uses a
subscribed telephone line,
communication errors may
occur if the status of the
picked up telephone line is
bad, and if it is re-
communicated by automatic
redial, it will grab a good
telephone line and send it
normally.
Since a communication
management report is
necessary for trend survey, a
communication
management report is
automatically printed.
Have the customer keep it.
Have the customer keep it.
By outputting the
communication protocol
monitor log at the time of
error occurrence, it is
possible to investigate
where an error occurred in
the communication.
In “FAX Maintenance
Mode”, set “error only”
“automatic printing” as
necessary.
Check the error occurrence
status by acquiring the
recording data of the
communication at the time
of error occurrence
7
REPAIR WORK
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
1. Power Off the printer, and disconnect the AC Cable form printer. (+) Stubby screwdriver O --- Total length 47 mm or less
2. Push the Power button until Power LED is turned off. Flathead Precision O ---
screwdriver
The Power LED lights for a few seconds when the power supply Torque screwdriver O ---
button is pushed.
Make sure to push the Power button until Power LED is turned off. Tweezers O ---
(When power LED is turned off, this operation is finished) Tube Clip O TBD
Longnose pliers O ---
Cleaning stick O 1709718
Tape O --- Secure the cover open sensor
(adjustment)
Scale O --- Adjustment
Jigs
Availa EPSON
Name Remarks
bility Part Code
Thickness gauge O ---
Teflon tape O 1706715
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT O 1684353
Figure 7-1. Releasing method of the stored electricity
Note 1 : Some of the tools listed above are commercially available.
2 : EPSON provides the tools listed with EPSON part code
Start
B P. 246
Left Ink Pack Cover Sub IS BK Inner Cover Cover Open Sensor
Assy Assy (BK)
IS BK Inner Cover
Hinge Guide Link Lever Open Sensor (BK)
Assy
C P. 246
Right Ink Pack Cover Sub ISCL Inner Cover Cover Open Sensor
Assy Assy (CL)
IS CL Inner Cover
Hinge Guide Link Lever Open Sensor (CL)
Assy
M P. 247 D P. 246
Right Ink Pack Cover Option Upper Rear Option Drive Frame
Assy Housing Assy
Cover Open Sensor 2nd Left Housing & Option Feed Lever Option Rear Cover
2nd Pick Up Roller Upper Connector Connector Assy
(CL) Option Front Frame Cover Sensor
Assy
Option Feed Lever Option Pick Up Holder Option Rear Sub Frame
Option Right Cover
Cover Assy Assy
2nd Cassette Assy Cassette Detection Feed Sensor Cassette Paper Size Paper Detection Sensor Hopper Up/down
Sensor Sensor Sensor
E P. 246
ADF Cover Assy Document Mat Cover ASF Cover ADF Pad Assy ADF PF Support
Assy Guide
ADF PF Support
Document Stopper Right ADF Cover ADF Unit
Guide
Rear ADF Cover Assy ADF Document Size ADF Document Size
Sensor Sensor
G P. 246
Front Right Cover Rear Housing Assy Disconnect the FFCs Wi-Fi Board Relay Harness Cover
Move the PCB Head Relay Board PCB Relay CRCM PCB Mechanism Relay
PS Harness Holder Connector Cover Power Supply Unit
Panel unit (with mounting plate) Board Board
Front Right Housing Front Left Housing Connector Cover PCB Rom FAX Board Assy PDL SD Card CR Ferrite Core
Holder
IS CL Inner Cover
PCB Rom
Assy
H P. 246
Move the
1st Cassette Assy Rear Housing Assy
Panel unit
Front Middle Frame Magnet Holder Assy Upper Middle Housing Mounting Plate Assy
Ink System Assy Ink Supply Unit Ink Holder Cover Decompression Pump
Unit (Full/Home)
I P. 246
Move the
Panel unit
Cover Open Sensor Move the Ink Supply Remove the USB Host
Ink Supply CL Assy Open Sensor (BK) APG Encoder
(BK) Unit on the Main Frame Assy
1 P. 254
1 P. 253
CR Scale Mounting
APG Drive Assy Open Sensor (CL)
Plate
CR Unit
CR Scale Ink Supply CL Assy
(with CR Shaft)
Left PG Torsion
Right APG Cam
Spring
J P. 246
1st Pick Up Roller Feed Lever Feed Sensor Paper Size Sensor
N P. 247
Left SC Cover
Left Housing
K P. 246
Relay Harness
Rear Housing Assy
Cover
IS BK Inner Cover
Link Lever Rear ASF Solenoid Rear ASF Clutch Gear Duplex Print Assy Nip Release Sensor
Assy
Open Sensor (BK) ASF Drive Assy Power Supply Unit Ink Supply BK Assy Nip Release Solenoid
PF Brush Assy ASF Drive Assy Front Right Cover Front Left Housing Ink Holder Cover APG Drive Assy Paper Jam Assy
L P. 246
End Guide
Adjustment /
inspection
Adjustment name Program No. Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools Reference
paper /
feed tray
Adjustment PG Adjustment --- Set the clearance of the gap between --- Place a thickness gauge in the specified
Thickness gauge.
the nozzle surface of the print head and location and then move the carriage unit over P. 277
Teflon tape
the platen to an appropriate amount. the thickness gauge and check the clearance.
Inspection Leak Check --- To prevent ink leaks, make sure there is --- When the ink supply unit ink tubes are
no ink leaking from the joints of the attached to the print head, insert the leak check
--- P. 278
print head and ink supply unit ink jig and determine whether or not there is a leak
tubes. by whether or not ink adheres to it.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Select "Head ID Input" from the service
Input the ID incorporating the support mode menu and execute the item.
Head ID Input B10 correction values for print head --- (Auto input) After the ID is input, check --- P. 279
production variations. that the correct print head ID has been
written in the same menu.
Select "Counter Reset - PF/EJ" from the
Counter Reset - PF/EJ B11 --- service support mode menu and execute --- P. 280
Reset the deterioration correction the counter reset.
counter for the corresponding
Initial settings part. Select "Counter Reset - ASF" from the
Counter Reset - ASF B12 --- service support mode menu and execute --- P. 280
the counter reset.
When you replace the rear ASF Select "Counter Reset - Rear Tray" from
Counter Reset - Rear Tray B13 unit (periodic replacement part), --- the service support mode menu and --- P. 280
reset the print counter. execute the counter reset.
Reset the deterioration correction
Initialization the PW Sensor Execute "VPW / VH_Low2" from the
B14 counter for the corresponding --- --- P. 281
(VPW / VH_Low2) service support mode menu.
part.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
In order to check the assembly
state when replacing APG related Select "APG Move Check" from the
parts, check that there is no service support mode menu and execute
APG Move Check B20 operation load abnormality and --- the item, and then visually check that the --- P. 329
whether the APG stops at the APG switching operation performs the
specified position when specified movement.
switching the APG.
Check that there are no speed
variations or organic variations in
Select "CR Scale Check" from the service
CR Scale Check B21 the CR operation due to damage --- --- P. 330
support mode menu and execute the item.
or deterioration of the CR scale
surface.
Check that the shutter for
Select "PW Sensor Shutter Move" from
reducing the amount of mist on
PW Sensor Shutter Move B22 --- the service support mode menu and --- P. 330
the PW sensor is operating
execute the item.
normally.
Inspection
(mechanical) For poor assembling detection
when replacing the PE sensor
part, pass paper through and Paper type: Plain paper
Select "PE Sensor Check" from the service
PE Sensor Check B23 check that the chattering after Size: A4 --- P. 331
support mode menu and execute the item.
detection of the paper trailing Paper source: Paper cassette (1)
edge by the PE sensor stops
within the set time.
Select "Temp. and hum. Sensor Check"
from the service support mode menu and
Check that the temperature and
Temp. and hum. Sensor execute the item, and then determine
B24 humidity sensors are operating --- --- P. 332
Check whether or not the sensor operation is
normally.
normal or abnormal based on the displayed
temperature and humidity information.
Check that the solenoid for
Select "Nip Release Solenoid / Sensor"
Nip Release Solenoid / releasing the nip for the purpose
B25 --- from the service support mode menu and --- P. 333
Sensor of reducing paper skew is
execute the item.
operating normally.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Check that an abnormal signal
that will cause a Nozzle Select "Nozzle Noise Check" from the
Nozzle Noise Check B26 diagnostic function problem is --- service support mode menu and execute --- P. 334
not occurring as a result of a part the item.
failure or poor assembling.
Set the rank for setting the
optimal judgment threshold value Select "Nozzle Rank Categorise" from the
Nozzle Rank Categorise B27 of each nozzle to ensure Nozzle --- service support mode menu and execute --- P. 334
diagnostic function detection the item.
accuracy.
Select "Nozzle Detect Move Check" from
Check that Nozzle diagnostic
Nozzle Detect Move Check B28 --- the service support mode menu and --- ---
function is operating normally.
execute the item.
Paper type: Plain paper
Size: A4
Print check patterns to check that Select "Check Pattern Printing" from the
Check Pattern Printing B29 there is no problem with the final Paper source: service support mode menu and execute --- P. 335
print quality. Any (paper cassette (1) to the item to print the check patterns.
Inspection paper cassette (4) or rear
(printing) tray)
Paper type: Plain paper
Size: A4, Letter Select "RGB Pattern Printing" from the
Print patterns for checking the Paper source: service support mode menu and execute
RGB Pattern Printing B30 --- P. 338
banding level of each color. Any (paper cassette (1) to the item to print the banding level check
paper cassette (4) or rear patterns.
tray)
Paper type: Plain paper Select "Ruled Line Pattern" from the
Print patterns to check for ruled service support mode menu and execute
Ruled Line Pattern B31 Size: A3 --- P. 340
line deviation. the item to print the ruled line deviation
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) check patterns.
Paper type: Plain paper
Size: A4 Select "Nozzle Check Pattern" from the
Print patterns for checking for Paper source: service support mode menu
Nozzle Check Pattern B32 --- P. 342
missing nozzles. Any (paper cassette (1) to and execute the item to print the nozzles
paper cassette (4) missing check patterns.
or rear tray)
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Automatically measure the correction
value and perform the operation load
CR Motor Dispersion check by selecting "CR Motor Dispersion
B40 --- --- P. 282
Correct Correct" from the service support mode
menu and executing the item.
Measure product variations to set
the appropriate correction values.
Automatically measure the correction
Also, make a pass/fail judgment
Adjustment value and perform the operation load
PF Motor Dispersion by calculating whether or not the
(mechanical) B41 --- check by selecting "PF Motor Dispersion --- P. 282
Correct operation load is within the
Correct" from the service support mode
expected range from the motor
menu and executing the item.
current value.
Automatically measure the correction
value and perform the operation load
ASFLIFT Dispersion
B42 --- check by selecting "ASF/LIFT Dispersion --- P. 282
Correct
Correct" from the service support mode
menu and executing the item.
Select "Head angular Adjustment Mech"
from the service support mode menu and
execute the item to print the adjustment
Mechanically correct the print Paper type: Photo matte paper pattern.
Head angular Adjustment offset due to part product
B43 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 283
Mech variations and tilting at the time
Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
of print head attachment.
criteria and then perform adjustment by
turning the adjustment dial provided on the
Adjustment carriage unit.
(print
adjustment) Select "Head angular Adjustment Soft"
Paper type: Business plain paper from the service support mode menu and
execute the item to print the adjustment
Use software to correct the Size: A4
pattern.
Head angular Adjustment vertical or horizontal tilting that Paper source:
B44 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 287
Soft occurs at the time of print Any (paper cassette (1) to
attachment. adjustment pattern based on the judgment
paper cassette (4) or rear
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
tray) from the Head angular Adjustment Soft
menu.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Paper type: Plain paper, business Select "PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust" from the
service support mode menu and execute the
Correct the impact offset caused plain paper
item to print the adjustment pattern.
by a difference in the speed of the Size: A4
PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust B45 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 290
low-speed part and acceleration/ Paper source:
adjustment pattern based on the judgment
deceleration part of the CR. Any (paper cassette (1) to
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
paper cassette (4)) from the PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust menu.
Select "Bi-d Adjust" from the service support
Use software to correct the print Paper type: Plain paper mode menu and execute the item to print the
timing for aligning the print Size: A4 adjustment pattern.
Bi-d Adjust B46 position between the outward Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 293
path and return path when Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
bidirectional printing. paper cassette (4)) criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the Bi-d Adjust menu.
Select "PTS Position Adjust" from the service
Paper type: Plain paper, business support mode menu
Use software to correct the print plain paper and execute the item to print the adjustment
Adjustment timing for reducing the
Size: A4 pattern.
(print PTS Position Adjust B47 bidirectional offset of the paper --- P. 296
adjustment) edge when printing using a Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the
specific PG value. Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
paper cassette (4)) criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the PTS Position Adjust menu.
Select "Bi-d Band Adjust" from the service
Use software to correct the print Paper type: Business plain paper support mode menu
timing for aligning the print
Size: A4 and execute the item to print the adjustment pattern.
position between the outward
Bi-d Band Adjust B48 Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 299
path and return path when
bidirectional printing in band Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
feed mode. paper cassette (4) criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the Bi-d Band Adjust menu.
Select "PW Sensor Correct" from the service
support mode menu and execute the item to
Use software to correct the offset Paper type: Photo matte paper print the adjustment pattern.
PW Sensor Correct B49 due to sensor characteristics and Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 302
attachment variations. Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the PW Sensor Correct menu.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Select "Print Start Pos. Adjust (FASF)" from
the service support mode menu and execute the
Paper type: Plain paper
item to print the adjustment pattern.
Size: A4
Print Start Pos. Adjust Determine the adjustment value from the
B50 Paper source: Ruler P. 305
(FASF) adjustment pattern based on the judgment
Any (paper cassette (1) to criteria and then
Use software to correct the print paper cassette (4)
enter the adjustment value from the Print
timing so that the main scanning
Start Pos. Adjust (FASF) menu.
direction print start position
becomes the target value. Select "Print Start Pos. Adjust (RASF)" from
the service support mode menu and execute the
Paper type: Plain paper item to print the adjustment pattern.
Print Start Pos. Adjust
B51 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 305
(RASF)
Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the Print Start Pos. Adjust (RASF) menu.
Select "PE Adjust (FASF)" from the service
Paper type: Plain paper support mode menu and execute the item to
Adjustment
Size: A4 print the adjustment pattern.
(print
PE Adjust (FASF) B52 Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 308
adjustment)
Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
Use software to correct the paper criteria and then enter the adjustment value
paper cassette (4)
detection position offset caused from the PE Adjust (FASF) menu.
by variations in the PE sensor
attachment position and print Select "PE Adjust (RASF)" from the service
head position. support mode menu and execute the item to
Paper type: Plain paper print the adjustment pattern.
PE Adjust (RASF) B53 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 308
Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the PE Adjust (RASF) menu.
Select "Feed Adjust" from the service
Use software to correct the support mode menu and execute the item
variation in the actual feed Paper type: Photo matte paper to print the adjustment pattern.
Feed Adjust B54 amount of paper caused by Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 311
production variations of the PF/ Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
EJ rollers. criteria and then enter the adjustment value
from the Feed Adjust menu.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Paper type: Plain paper Select "Band Feed Adjust" from the service
Correct the paper feed error that support mode menu and execute the item to
Size: A4 print the adjustment pattern.
occurs due to mechanical
Band Feed Adjust B55 variations or media feed Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 314
characteristics in band feed Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
mode. paper cassette (4) or rear criteria and then enter the adjustment value
Adjustment tray) from the Band Feed Adjust menu.
(print
Paper type: Plain paper, business Select "A - B BT Band Adjust" from the service
adjustment)
plain paper support mode menu and execute the item to
Correct the amount of paper feed Size: A4, Letter print the adjustment pattern.
A - B BT Band Adjust B65 to match the ink impact state of Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 317
actual printing. Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
paper cassette (4) or rear criteria and then enter the adjustment value
tray) from the A - B BT Band Adjust menu.
Select "PTS Acc. And Dec. Adjust
Correct the impact offset caused by a (Short)" from the service support mode
difference in the speed of the low-speed menu and execute the item to print the
part and acceleration/deceleration part of Paper type: Plain paper, business adjustment pattern.
PTS Acc. And Dec. Adjust the CR. plain paper
B61 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 320
(Short) Perform adjustment in only a specific Size: A4 adjustment pattern based on the judgment
adjustment area and perform automatic Paper source: Paper cassette (1) criteria and then
calculation for other than that area to
determine the correction value. enter the adjustment value from the PTS
Acc. And Dec. Adjust (Short) menu.
Use software to correct the print timing Select "Bi-D Adjust (Short)" from the service
for aligning the print position between support mode menu and execute the item to
the outward path and return path when Paper type: Plain paper print the adjustment pattern.
Simple bidirectional printing. Perform
adjustment Bi-D Adjust (Short) B62 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 323
adjustment in only a specific adjustment
area and perform automatic calculation Paper source: Paper cassette (1) adjustment pattern based on the judgment
for other than that area to determine the criteria and then enter the adjustment value
correction value. from the Bi-D Adjust (Short) menu.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Correct the paper feed error that Select "Band Feed Adjust (Short)" from
occurs due to mechanical the service support mode menu
variations or media feed
Paper type: Plain paper and execute the item to print the
characteristics in band feed
Size: A4 adjustment pattern.
Simple mode.
Band Feed Adjust (Short) B64 Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 327
adjustment Perform adjustment in only a
Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
specific adjustment area and
paper cassette (4) criteria and then
perform automatic calculation for
other than that area to determine enter the adjustment value from the Band
the correction value. Feed Adjust (Short) menu.
Judge whether or not the print
head needs to be replaced when
missing nozzles, unstable
discharge, or misalignment Select "Print Head" from the service
Print Head B90 --- --- P. 346
discharge occurs. support mode menu and execute the item.
If replacement is required,
Preparation perform the preparation required
work before for replacement.
repair Perform the operation required
before replacing the ink supply Select "Ink Supply Unit" from the service
I/S Unit B91 --- --- P. 347
unit because of an ink supply unit support mode menu and execute the item.
failure.
Select "Maintenance Unit" from the
Perform the operation required
Maintenance Unit B92 --- service support mode menu and execute --- P. 347
before replacing the ink system.
the item.
Select "Head Replace Sequence" from the
Sequentially display the
service support mode menu and execute
Head Replace Sequence B80 adjustments required after print --- --- P. 348
the item to perform the adjustments
After unit head replacement.
required after print head replacement.
repair operation
mode (five Select "Ink Supply Unit Replace
main parts) Sequentially display the Sequence" from the service support mode
Ink Supply Unit Replace
B81 adjustments required after ink --- menu and execute the item to perform the --- P. 348
Sequence
supply unit replacement. adjustments required after ink supply unit
replacement.
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Select "Mainte Unit Replace Sequence"
Sequentially display the from the service support mode menu and
Mainte Unit Replace
B82 adjustments required after ink --- execute the item to perform the --- P. 349
Sequence
system replacement. adjustments required after ink system
replacement.
Select "R-ASF Unit Replace Sequence"
After unit
Sequentially display the from the service support mode menu and
repair operation R-ASF Unit Replace
B83 adjustments required after rear --- execute the item to perform the --- P. 349
mode (five Sequence
tray replacement. adjustments required after rear tray
main parts)
replacement.
Select "Main Board Replace Sequence"
Sequentially display the from the service support mode menu and
Main Board Replace
B84 adjustments required after main --- execute the item to perform the --- P. 350
Sequence
board replacement. adjustments required after main board
replacement.
Maintenance
Adjustment /
Adjustment
Program inspection
Adjustment name Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No. paper /
details
feed tray
Fill the print head and ink channels with ink
Head Ink Fill C01 to enable printing. (Perform this after print --- --- P. 344
head replacement.) Select "Head Ink Fill" from the service
Fill the print head and ink channels with ink support mode menu and execute the
Ink filling
to enable printing. item to check the discharge state with
Initial Ink Fill C02 (Perform this after replacement of the ink --- the nozzle check patterns. --- P. 344
supply path parts between the RIS unit and
print head.)
Head Cleaning CL1 C03
Head Cleaning CL2 C04
Select a head cleaning item from the
Head Cleaning CL3 C05
Head Perform this to recover from missing dots or service support mode menu and
Head Cleaning --- --- P. 344
Cleaning C06 print defects of the print head. execute the item to check the discharge
Maintenance Strong state with the nozzle check patterns.
functions Head Cleaning
C07
Refresh
Discharge ink to release the pressure applied
to the ink inside the supply path from the
Select "Ink Discharge (Head)" from the
head for the purpose of preventing ink leaks
Ink Discharge (Head) C08 --- service support mode menu and --- P. 345
after print head replacement. (However, this
execute the item.
is not required after normal print head
replacement.)
Ink Discharge
Discharge the ink inside the supply path Select "Ink Discharge (Ink Supply
Ink Discharge (I/S) C09 from the ink supply unit to the print head and --- Unit)" from the service support mode --- P. 345
replace it with air. menu and execute the item.
Select "Ink Discharge (Pump)" from
Ink Discharge Discharge the waste ink remaining in the
C10 --- the service support mode menu and --- P. 345
(Pump) suction pump (ink system).
execute the item.
C H E C K Meaning of the marks used in the tables on the following pages are as
P O IN T follows.
○: Required only when replacing
◎: Required when removing and/or replacing
---: No adjustment is required
CR Motor Assy
PF Motor Assy
Main Board
PW Sensor
Print Head
PCB Rom
Adjustment item
CR Scale
CR Unit
1 PG Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ -
2 Leak Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
3 Head ID Input - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - -
4 Ink Discharge (Head) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Ink Discharge (I/S) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - -
Ink Discharge (Pump) - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5 Ink Filling (Head ink fill) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - -
Ink Filling (Initial ink fill) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - -
6 Counter Reset - PF/EJ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - - -
7 Counter Reset - ASF ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8 Counter Reset - Rear Tray - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9 Initialization the PW Sensor (VPW / VH_Low2) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○
10 PW Sensor Correct - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎
11 CR Motor Dispersion Correct - - ○ - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - ○ - - ○ -
12 PF Motor Dispersion Correct - - ○ - - - - ○ - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
13 ASF/LIFT Dispersion Correct - ○ ○ ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
14 APG Move Check - - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
15 CR Scale Check - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - ◎ ◎ -
16 PW Sensor Shutter Move - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○
17 PE Sensor Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
18 Temp. and hum. Sensor Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - -
19 Nip Release Solenoid / Sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - -
20 Nozzle Noise Check - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ -
21 Nozzle Rank Categorize - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ -
22 Nozzle Detect Move Check - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ -
CR Motor Assy
PF Motor Assy
Main Board
Print Head
PW Sensor
PCB Rom
Adjustment item
CR Scale
CR Unit
23 Head angular Adjustment Mech - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ -
24 Head angular Adjustment Soft - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ -
25 PTS Acc. And Dec. Adjust (Short) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ -
26 PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust - - - - - - - - - - ○* - - - - - - ◎* - - - - - ◎* -
27 Bi-D Adjust (Short) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ -
28 Bi-D Adjust - - - - - - - - - - ○* - - - - - - ◎* - - - - - ◎* -
29 PTS Position Adjust - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
30 Bi-D Band Adjust (Short) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ -
31 Bi-D Band Adjust - - - - - - - - - - ○* - - - - - - ◎* - - - - - ◎* -
32 Print Start Pos. Adjust (FASF) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - ○ - - - - - - - ◎ ◎
33 Print Start Pos. Adjust (RASF) - - - - - - - - ◎ - ○ - - - - ○ - - - - - - - ◎ ◎
34 PE Adjust (FASF) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
35 PE Adjust (RASF) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
36 Feed Adjust ○ - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - - -
37 Band Feed Adjust (Short) ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ ◎ - - - - - - -
38 Band Feed Adjust ○ - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - ○* ○* ◎* - - - - - - -
39 A - B BT Band Adjust ○ - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - ○ ○ ◎ - - - - - - -
40 Check Pattern Printing ◎ - - - - - - - ◎ - ◎ - - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎
41 RGB Pattern Printing ◎ - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎
42 Ruled Line Pattern - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎
* : Perform the adjustments of the full version for a user who uses special paper.
No
Is PG within standard?
Yes
PG adjustment is
Preparation 3. Fold the excess portions of Teflon tape along the edges of the thickness
gauge, and trim the portions at about the center in the thickness direction of
Preparing the thickness gauge
the sides.
The print head of this product has a structure with an 4. Make sure there are no tears or burrs on the affixed Teflon tape. Preparation
integrated print head cover and print head nozzle surface. of the thickness gauge is finished.
Therefore, if the thickness gauge touches the nozzle Before trimming of Teflon tape Teflon tape
surface in the same way as when performed with the
conventional procedure, the nozzle surface of the print
head may be damaged.
When performing the PG adjustment or PG check, be
sure to affix Teflon tape (thickness: 0.08 mm) to the Thickness gauge
thickness gauges (1.00 mm) that you will use for the Fold the Teflon tape at the edges and trim it at the
adjustment or check to prevent damage to the nozzle center in the thickness direction.
After trimming of
surface of the print head. Teflon tape
When affixing Teflon tape to the thickness gauges, make
sure no air or foreign matter enters between the thickness
gauges and tape.
Teflon tape
Procedure for affixing Teflon tape Thickness gauge
1. Clean the surfaces of the thickness gauge using alcohol, and make sure there
is no dirt or contamination on the surfaces.
Figure 7-16. Preparing Thickness Gauge (2)
2. Affix Teflon tape to the thickness gauge (1.00 mm) as shown below.
Preparing the product
Teflon tape 1. Remove the ink supply cover (BK) and ink supply cover (CL).
2. Remove the inner sub cover (BK) and inner sub cover (CL).
CR bearing
1
Hole
PG adjustment procedure 2. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer, and place the 1.40 mm thickness
gauge (1.32 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position A shown
When performing PG adjustment, observe the following points. in Figure 7-19.
Move the CR unit left and right by holding the top of the
CR timing belt. 130-digit side 0-digit side
Left PG adjustment lever (130-digit side) Right PG adjustment lever (0-digit side)
PG: Large
Screw Screw
Rib
PG: Small
PG: Large
PG: Small
Thickness gauge
Holder
Figure 7-19. Placement of Thickness Gauge
Rib
3. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle Adjustment of the 130-digit side (Left side of printer)
surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
1. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer, and place the 1.41 mm thickness
• If touches the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 4. gauge (1.33 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position B shown
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the in Figure 7-19.
procedure below.
2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle
3-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-18) in the
• If touches the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 3.
“-” direction.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
3-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not procedure below.
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
2-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG
• If touch the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 4. adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-18) in the
• If does not touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center “-” direction.
part of the printer, and repeat the work of Step 3-1 to Step 3-2 until the
2-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not
nozzle surface touches the thickness gauge.
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
4. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and place the 1.31 mm • If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment.
thickness gauge (1.23 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position • If touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center part of
A shown in Figure 7-19. the printer, and repeat Step 2-1 to Step 2-2 until the nozzle surface
5. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle touches the thickness gauge.
surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge. 3. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer, and place the 1.31 mm thickness
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment. gauge (1.23 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position B shown
• If touches the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the in Figure 7-20.
procedure below.
4. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle
5-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-18) in the • If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment.
“+” direction. • If touches the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
5-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not procedure below.
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge. 4-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-18) in the
• If touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center part of “+” direction.
the printer, and repeat the work of Step 5-1 to Step 5-2 until the nozzle
surface does not touche the thickness gauge.
4-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not Checking the PG
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment
• If touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center part of 2. Place the 1.31 mm thickness gauge (1.23 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon
the printer, and repeat the work of Step 4-1 to Step 4-2 until the nozzle tape) at the position shown in Figure 7-20.
surface does not touch the thickness gauge.
After adjusting the 0-digit side and 130-digit side in accordance
with the adjustment procedure, adjust the 0-digit side again.
Thickness gauge
INK LEAK CHECK 2. Check the ink adherence state on the cloudy surface of the PET chips to determine
whether or not there is an ink leak.
An ink leak check is required when disconnecting the ink supply unit from the print Judgment criterion of leak check
head. Check whether or not ink is adhered at a position of 2 mm or more from the
The judgment method of the ink leak check is described below. leading edge of the cloudy surface of the PET chips. (Consider the result to be
a fail if any of the two PET chips for the leak check does not pass the check.)
C H E C K Leak check jigs (PET chips for leak check) need to be attached
P O IN T during the part replacement work. • Pass (no ink leak)
For the procedure to attach the leak check jigs, refer to P. 598 and When ink adherence is less than 2 mm from the leading edge of the PET
P. 625. chip
• Fail (ink leak)
Leak check procedure When ink adherence is 2 mm or more from the leading edge of the PET
chip
1. Pull out the PET chips for the leak check.
2 mm
PET chip
Leading edge
Cloudy surface
NG OK
7.2.4.2 Software Adjustment Menu 5. Press the [2] button. Head ID input is executed. (To not execute it, press the [8]
(Service Support Mode [Program in Main Unit]) button to return to the Initialize menu)
INITIALIZE MENU
Head ID Input
Head ID Input (Head ID Input (B10)) Update?
Yes : [2]
1. Start the service support mode.
No : [8]
(Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83))
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
3. Select “Head ID Input”.
Counter Reset (PF/EJ, ASF or Rear Tray) 5. [Press the [2] button. Initializing is executed. (To not execute it, press the [8]
(Counter Reset - PF/EJ (B11)/Counter Reset - ASF (B12)/ button to return to the Initialize menu.)
Counter Reset - Rear Tray (B13))
6. Check that the current correction value in the Counter Reset screen is "0" after
1. Start the service support mode. execution of the counter reset.
(Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83))
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu. Counter Reset - ○○○○
3. Select “Counter Reset”.
Value : _ _ _ _ _ Current value
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below. Reset Value ?
Yes : [2] No: [8]
4. The correction and motor cycle check results are displayed after correction ends.
1. Start the service support mode.
(Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83))
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
3. Select “Counter Reset”.
Judgment
Make adjustments so that the spacing between the pattern lines when the
adjustment value is “0” becomes equal.
4. The Head angular Adjustment Mech menu appears. 7. Check the adjustment pattern.
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. Check the adjustment pattern and check the adjustment value for which the
line spacing is the most equal.
6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
C H E C K The following two types of patterns are printed in the
Head angular Adjustment Mech P O IN T adjustment pattern.
Print settings for
adjustment pattern Current Setting
Coarse adjustment pattern
printing The adjusted value is printed by five steps
Rear
(-10, -5, 0, +5, +10).
Change the print A4
settings
PhotoMat Detail adjustment pattern
The adjusted value is printed by three steps
Change Setting [6]Button
(-5, -3, 0, +3, +5).
Print the adjustment
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button
Skip adjustment
Skip Print [4]Button
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
value input screen
Figure 7-25. Head angular Adjustment Mech Screen
8. Perform the Adjustment. 8-3.Turn the adjustment dial based on the adjustment value confirmed in
Step 7.
If the tape of the front cover open sensor comes off during the
adjustment, make sure that the CR unit is securely fixed C H E C K The adjustment dial adjustment method is as follows.
because it moves to the home position and is dangerous P O IN T Clockwise (CW) : “+” direction
Counterclockwise (CCW) : ”-” direction
8-1. A confirmation screen appears. Press the [2] button. The carriage unit
moves to the maintenance position. (To not perform adjustment, press the
Screws Print head
[8] button.) Head angular adjustment dial
+5
-5
Head angualr Adjustment Mech
Execute Head Adjustment? CCW:
- direction
Execute: [2]
Cancel : [8] 0
Screw
CW:
+ direction
-5
+5
Screw
Figure 7-28. Confirmation Screen Figure 7-29. Print Head Fixing Screws
8-2. Turn the four print head fixing screws counterclockwise by 90 degrees to 8-4. Tighten the four fixing screws.
loosen them.
Adjustment pattern C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
P O IN T either procedure A or B below.
Judgment
From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and
below lines are the straightest.
4. The Head angular Adjustment Soft menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for Head angular Adjustment Soft 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern Current Setting judgment procedure.
printing
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Bizplain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment [#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-31. Head angular Adjustment Soft Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
Prev[2]
Next[8] OK[#}
Figure 7-32. Input Screen
10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.
Judgment
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and
right patterns.
4. The B45 PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern
printing Current Setting judgment procedure.
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
[#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-33. PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust menu
P O IN T enables the print settings to be changed. PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust
Displays the entered
[Operating procedure] adjustment values #1/16
• [2] and [8] buttons:Changes the setting
• [#] button:Confirms (moves to next page) Displays the Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
adjustment value
input screen
PTS Acc. And Bec. Adjust Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
or next page of the
Select Feed Tray adjustment screen Prev [2] - Next [8]
Finish [#]
Tray: Rear Finishes adjustment
Judgment
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and
right patterns.
4. The Bi-d Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Bi-d Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
Print settings for
adjustment pattern Current Setting judgment procedure.
printing Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment [#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-35. Bi-d Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Bi-d Adjust menu enables the
P O IN T print settings to be changed. Bi-d Adjust
[Operating procedure] Displays the entered #1/12
• [2] and [8] buttons : Changes the setting adjustment values
• [#] button : Confirms (moves to next page) Displays the Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
adjustment value
input screen
Bi-d Adjust Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
Select Feed Tray or next page of the Prev [2] - Next [8]
adjustment screen Finish [#]
Finishes adjustment
Tray: Rear
Bi-d Adjust
Judgment
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and
right patterns.
4. The PTS Position Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
PTS Position Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
Print settings for
adjustment pattern Current Setting judgment procedure.
printing Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment [#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-37. PTS Position Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
Judgment
From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and
below lines are the straightest.
4. The Bi-d Band Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for Bi-d Band Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern judgment procedure.
printing Current Setting
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment [#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-39. Bi-D Band Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Bi-D Band Adjust menu enables
P O IN T the print settings to be changed. Bi-d Band Adjust
[Operating procedure] Displays the entered #1/4
• [2] and [8] buttons : Changes the setting adjustment values
• [#] button : Confirms (moves to next page) Val: --- (Range -128 to 128)
Displays the
adjustment value
input screen
Bi-d Band Adjust Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
Select Feed Tray or next page of the Prev [2] - Next [8]
adjustment screen Finish [#]
Tray: Rear
Finishes adjustment
Judgment
From the stepped patterns printed on the bottom, top, left, and right edges of
the paper, select the numerical value that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper
for each of them.
4. The PW Sensor Correct menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for PW Sensor Correct 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern judgment procedure.
printing Current Setting
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment [#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-41. PW Sensor Correct Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
PW Sensor Correct
Judgment
From the stepped pattern printed on the left edge of the paper, select the
numerical value that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper.
4. The Print Start Pos. Adjust (FASF) or Print Start Pos. Adjust (RASF) menu 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
appears. 7. Check the adjustment pattern.
8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
Print settings for Print Start Pos. FASF judgment procedure.
adjustment pattern
printing
Current Setting 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Cassette 1
Change the print A4 C H E C K Operation method is belows.
settings
Plain P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
[2] button or [8] button:
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button screen.
Skip Print [4]Button
Skip adjustment [#] button:
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
value input screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
Figure 7-43. Print Start Pos. Adjust Screen key is displayed
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Print Start Pos. Adjust menu Print Start Pos. FASF
P O IN T enables the print settings to be changed. Displays the entered #1/1
[Operating procedure] adjustment values
• [2] and [8] buttons : Changes the setting Displays the Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
• [#] button : Confirms (moves to next page) adjustment value
input screen
Print Start Pos. FASF Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
or next page of the Prev [2] - Next [8]
Select Feed Tray adjustment screen
Finish [#]
Finishes adjustment
Tray: Rear
Prev[2]
Figure 7-44. Input Screen
Next[8] OK[#}
10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
(#○ to #○) and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.
Judgment
From the stepped patterns printed on the top and bottom edges (the bottom
edge is for rear paper feeding only) of the paper, select the numerical value
that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper for each of them.
4. The PE Adjust (FASF) or PE Adjust (RASF) menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for PE Adjust FASF 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern judgment procedure.
printing Current Setting
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
[#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-45. PE Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the PE Adjust menu enables the print
P O IN T settings to be changed. PE Adjust FASF
[Operating procedure] Displays the entered #1/1
adjustment values
• [2] and [8] buttons : Changes the setting
• [#] button : Confirms (moves to next page) Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
Displays the
adjustment value
input screen
PE Adjust FASF
Select Feed Tray Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
or next page of the Prev [2] - Next [8]
adjustment screen Finish [#]
Tray: Rear
Finishes adjustment
Prev[2]
Figure 7-46. Input Screen
Next[8] OK[#}
10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
(#○ to #○) and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.
Judgment
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper
and lower blocks and the least white bands.
4. The Feed Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for Feed Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern Current Setting judgment procedure.
printing
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
[#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-47. Feed Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Feed Adjust menu enables the
P O IN T print settings to be changed. Feed Adjust
[Operating procedure] Displays the entered
adjustment values
#1/1
• [2] and [8] buttons : Changes the setting
• [#] button : Confirms (moves to next page) Displays the Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
adjustment value
²
input screen
Feed Adjust
Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
Select Feed Tray or next page of the Prev [2] - Next [8]
adjustment screen
Finish [#]
Tray: Rear
Finishes adjustment
Feed Adjust
Judgment
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper
and lower blocks and the least white bands.
4. The Band Feed Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for Band Feed Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern judgment procedure.
printing Current Setting
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip Print [4]Button screen.
Skip adjustment
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
[#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-49. Band Feed Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Band Feed Adjust menu enables
P O IN T the print settings to be changed. Band Feed Adjust
[Operating procedure] Displays the entered #1/6
• [2] and [8] buttons : Changes the setting adjustment values
• [#] button : Confirms (moves to next page) Displays the Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
adjustment value
input screen
Band Feed Adjust
Select Feed Tray Moves to the previous Set Value [6]
or next page of the Prev [2] - Next [8]
adjustment screen Finish [#]
Tray: Rear
Finishes adjustment
Prev[2]
Figure 7-50. Input Screen
Next[8] OK[#}
10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
(#○ to #○) and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.
Judgment
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper
and lower blocks and the least white bands.
4. The B65 A - B BT Band Adjust menu appears. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
Print settings for A - B BT Band Feed Adjust 8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
adjustment pattern judgment procedure.
printing Current Setting
Cassette 1 9. Enter the adjustment value.
Change the print A4
settings C H E C K Operation method is belows.
Plain
P O IN T [6] button:
Displays the adjustment value input screen
Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment [2] button or [8] button:
pattern Print Pattern [#]Button Moves to the previous or next page of the adjustment
Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button screen.
pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
[#] button:
value input screen Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
Figure 7-51. B65 A - B BT Band Adjust Screen In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. key is displayed
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the PTS Acc. And Dec. Adjust
P O IN T (Short) menu enables the print settings to be changed. Displays the entered PTS Acc. And Dec. Adjust (Short)
[Operating procedure] adjustment values #1/8
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page) Displays the adjustment Val: --- (Range -128 to 127)
value input screen
Prev[2]
Figure 7-54. Input Screen
Next[8] OK[#}
10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
(#○ to #○) and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.
6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment procedure.
9. Enter the adjustment value.
Bi-D Adjust (Short) (B62) 4. The Bi-D Adjust (Short) menu appears.
Paper and feed tray
Print settings for Bi-D Adjust (Short)
• Paper size:A4 adjustment pattern
• Paper type:Plain paper printing Current Setting
• Paper feed tray:Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4) Cassette 1
Change the print
settings A4
Adjustment pattern Plain
Same as Bi-D Adjust (P. 293)
Print the adjustment Change Setting [6]Button
Judgment pattern Print Pattern [#]Button
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button
right patterns. pattern printing and
go to the adjustment
Adjustment procedure value input screen
1. Start the service support mode. Figure 7-55. Bi-D Adjust (Short) Screen
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). 5. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Bi-D Adjust (Short) menu enables
3. Select “Bi-D Adjust (Short)”. P O IN T the print settings to be changed.
[Operating procedure]
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
either procedure A or B below. • [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
P O IN T
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page)
Bi-D Band Adjust (Short) (B63) 4. The Bi-D Band Adjust (Short) menu appears.
Paper and feed tray
Print settings for
• Paper size:A4 adjustment pattern
Bi-D Band Adjust (Short)
• Paper type:Business plain paper, plain paper printing Current Setting
• Paper feed tray:Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4) Cassette 1
Change the print A4
Adjustment pattern settings
Plain
Same as Bi-D Band Adjust (P. 299)
Judgment Change Setting [6]Button
Print the adjustment
From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and pattern Print Pattern [#]Button
below lines are the straightest. Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button
pattern printing and
Adjustment procedure go to the adjustment
value input screen
1. Start the service support mode.
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). Figure 7-57. Bi-D Band Adjust Screen
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu. 5. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
3. Select “Bi-D Band Adjust (Short)”. C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Bi-D Band Adjust (Short) menu
P O IN T enables the print settings to be changed.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
[Operating procedure]
P O IN T either procedure A or B below.
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page)
Band Feed Adjust (Short) (B64) 4. The Band Feed Adjust (Short) menu appears.
Paper and feed tray
• Paper size: A4 Print settings for Band Feed Adjust (Short)
adjustment pattern
• Paper type: Plain paper printing Current Setting
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4), rear tray Cassette 1
Change the print
A4
Adjustment pattern settings
Plain
Same as Band Feed Adjust (P. 314)
Judgment Print the adjustment Change Setting [6]Button
pattern [#]Button
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper Print Pattern
and lower blocks and the least white bands. Skip adjustment Skip Print [4]Button
pattern printing and
Adjustment procedure go to the adjustment
value input screen
1. Start the service support mode.
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). Figure 7-59. Band Feed Adjust (Short) Screen
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu. 5. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
3. Select “Band Feed Adjust (Short)”. C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Band Feed Adjust (Short) menu
P O IN T enables the print settings to be changed.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
[Operating procedure]
P O IN T either procedure A or B below.
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
• [#] button Confirms (moves to next page)
7.2.4.3 Check Screen Inspections 4. Visually check that the CR unit and CR shaft are operating as follows.
(Service Support Mode [Program in Main Unit]) 4-1. The CR shaft lifts from PG1 (state with CR unit at very bottom) to PG7
(state with CR unit at very top).
INSPECTION (MECHANICAL OPERATION CHECKS)
4-2. The paper guide transitions to the release state (state where raised from
APG Move Check (B20) paper feed roller).
1. Start the service support mode. 4-3. The paper guide transitions to the release cancel state (state where touching
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). paper feed roller).
4-4. The CR shaft is lowered from PG7 to PG1.
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
5. Adjustment is finished if operation is performed normally. If there was something
3. Select “APG Move Check”.
abnormal, reassemble the related parts.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below. P O IN T procedure A or B below.
A. Selecting by entering the program number A. Selecting by entering the program number
3-1. Select “B00 Adjustment - Input B Number” from the Adjustment 3-1. Select “B00 Adjustment - Input B Number” from the Adjustment
menu. menu.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
Enter program number “21”. Enter program number “22”.
3-3. Press the [OK] button. 3-3. Press the [OK] button.
Nozzle Detect Move Check (B28) Check Pattern Printing (A4) (B29)
1. Start the service support mode. Paper and feed tray
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). • Paper size:A4
• Paper type:Plain paper
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1), rear tray
3. Select “Nozzle Detect Move Check”.
Adjustment procedure
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either 1. Start the service support mode.
P O IN T procedure A or B below. Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83).
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
3. Select “Check Pattern”.
A. Selecting by entering the program number C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
P O IN T either procedure A or B below.
3-1. Select “B00 Adjustment - Input B Number” from the Adjustment
menu.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
Enter program number “28”. A. Selecting by entering the program number
3-3. Press the [OK] button. 3-1. Select “B00 Adjustment - Input B Number” from the Adjustment
menu.
B. Selecting from menu
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu. Enter program number “29”.
3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu. 3-3. Press the [OK] button.
3-3. Select “B28 Nozzle Detect Move Check” from the Printing Check
B. Selecting from menu
menu.
3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
C H E C K The check result is displayed on the panel. If “Error” is displayed,
3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment
P O IN T perform head cleaning to enable the state where all nozzles
menu.
discharge ink normally.
3-3. Select “B29 Check Pattern Printing (A4)” from the Printing Check
menu.
4. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
Pressing the [6] button in the Check Pattern menu enables the
Check Pattern Printing (A3) (B33)
C H E C K
P O IN T print settings to be changed. Paper and feed tray
[Operating procedure] • Paper size:A3
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting • Paper type:Plain paper
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page) • Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C2)
Adjustment procedure
Check Pattern Printing 1. Start the service support mode.
Select Feed Tray Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83).
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
Tray: Rear 3. Select “Check Pattern”.
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Check Pattern menu enables the
P O IN T print settings to be changed.
[Operating procedure]
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page)
Tray: Rear
Prev[2]
Next[8] OK[#}
Check pattern C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
P O IN T either procedure A or B below.
Judgment
Visually check the banding levels of the check pattern to confirm that there is
no problem.
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the RGB Pattern menu enables the
P O IN T print settings to be changed.
[Operating procedure]
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page)
Tray: Rear
Prev[2]
Next[8] OK[#}
5. If NG, refer to the following table and take the corresponding measure.
Check pattern C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using
P O IN T either procedure A or B below.
Judgment
Visually check the check patterns to confirm that there is no ruled line offset.
C H E C K Pressing the [6] button in the Rule Line Pattern menu enables
P O IN T the print settings to be changed.
[Operating procedure]
• [2] and [8] buttons: Changes the setting
• [#] button: Confirms (moves to next page)
Tray: Rear
Prev[2]
Next[8] OK[#}
Judgment
Visually check the check patterns to confirm that there are no nozzles missing
Tray: Rear
Prev[2]
Next[8] OK[#}
Head Ink Fill (C01) / Initial Ink Fill (C02) 1. Start the service support mode.
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83).
1. Start the service support mode.
2. Select “Maintenance: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83).
3. Select “Head Cleaning”.
2. Select “Maintenance: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
3. Select ink filling (Head Ink Fill or Initial Ink Fill). C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below.
Ink Discharge (Head), Ink Discharge (I/S), Ink Discharge (Pump) (C08/C09/
C10)
PREPARATION WORK BEFORE REPAIR 5. The print head replacement judgment cleaning is performed in accordance with
the nozzles missing state. Print the nozzle check pattern after replacement
Print Head (B90) judgment cleaning.
This operation is necessary to performing the “ Head Replace 6. Check the nozzle check pattern to confirm the nozzles missing state and then make
Sequence (B80)” correctly. a judgment of whether to replace the print head.
Make sure to perform the This operation before the print head If the nozzles missing state is not resolved (state in which print head
replacement. replacement is required):
Press the [2] button and go to step 7.
1. Start the service support mode.
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). When the nozzles missing state is resolved
(state in which recovery is possible by cleaning):
2. Select “Before Repair Operation:MENU”. Press the [8] button to end the preparation before print head replacement.
3. Select “B90 Print Head” from the Before Repair Operation menu.
4. Select whether or not to perform the print head replacement judgment (print head Print Head
Continue preparation Need heads change?
replacement judgment cleaning) in the Print Head screen. before print head
replacement. Go to step 7.
When you wish to perform print head replacement immediately
(wish to not perform the print head replacement judgment):
Yes: [2]Buttton
Press the [2] button and go to step 7. End preparation
before print head
No: [8]Button
When you wish to not perform print head replacement immediately replacement.
(wish to perform the print head replacement judgment):
Press the [8] button and go to step 7.
Figure 7-64. I/S Unit Screen Figure 7-65. Maintenance Unit Screen (1)
5. Check that the following screen is displayed and then press the power button to
turn off the power.
Maintenance Unit
Finish
Please Power off.
Push [Power] Button
AFTER UNIT REPAIR OPERATION MODE I/S Unit Replace Sequence (B81)
Maite Unit Replace Sequence (B82) R-ASF Unit Replace Sequence (B83)
1. Start the service support mode. 1. Start the service support mode.
Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83). Refer to "5.1 Service Support Mode" (p. 83).
2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode menu. 2. Select “Adjustment: MENU” from the service support mode menu.
3. Select “After Unit Repair Operation:MENU” from the Adjustment menu. 3. Select “After Unit Repair Operation: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
4. Select “B82 Maite Unit Replace Sequence”. 4. Select “B83 R-ASF Unit Replace Sequence”.
5. The inspections and ink filling are executed in the following sequence. 5. The following adjustments are performed.
1. Ink Filling (same as CL2) (p. 344) 1. Counter Reset - Rear Tray (p. 280)
2. Nozzle Check (p. 342) 2. Counter Reset - ASF (p. 280)
3. Print Start Pos. Adjust (RASF) (p. 305)
1
2
6
4
1 3
4
6
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
12
11
10
9
5 6
4
3 7
2
8
10
11
12
10
2 3
1 4
5
6
7
8
10
11
4
3
2
6
1
4 5
3 6
7
6
2
9
1
10
11
1
2
3
5
8
7
Figure 7-74. Electrical Components (1)
2
1 3
2
3
1 4
8 5
7
Figure 7-76. Ink System Mechanism
4 5
3 6
10
7
1 11
2
1
3
3 4
6
2
7
1
8 9
7
6
5 10
4
3
2
11
2
1
3
1 2
7.4 Repair Work 3. Rotate the gear counterclockwise from the access window to lower the CR lock
lever.
Ink Supply BK
Cover Assy
Gear
Hook
CR lock cover
CR lock CR Unlock
CR lock cover
When the CR lock drive gear is damaged, CR Lock lever may don’t 7.4.1.2 Removing the Maintenance Box
C H E C K
P O IN T come down by even rotating the Gear from access window. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
If CR Lock lever is not came down by rotating the gear, move the
CR Unit while pushing the CR Lock Lever. 2. Remove the Maintenance Box.
Maintenance Box
7.4.1.3 Removing the Ink Pack 4. Open the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
1. Open the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy. 5. Push the button of the Ink Pack (Y/M/C).
2. Push the button of the Ink Pack (BK). 6. Hold the handle, and remove the Ink Pack (Y/M/C) upward.
3. Hold the handle, and remove the Ink Pack (BK) upward.
Ink Pack (M) Ink Pack (C)
Handle
Button Handle
Ink Supply BK
Cover Assy Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
Part Name/Guide
Disassembly procedure of the listed parts or components are given in the section. Procedure
The capital letters in the “Guide” column are shown in the disassembly procedure pages Describes the disassembly procedure.
with a number. Follow the disassembly instructions on the pages with a capital letter for When reassembling, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.
your target part in numerical order.
EXAMPLE FOR READING DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 3. Find the “Guide” (the capital letter) in the disassembly procedure pages.
Then follow the instructions on the pages with the Guide indication in
1. Find your target part or component in the table.
numerical order.
2. See the Guide column, and remember the Guide (a capital letter) for the part/
component. Example: To remove the PCB Rom, find pages with the “A” guide.
If A1, A2, A3, and A8 are found, start from the A1 page, then
Example: The Guide for the PCB Rom is “A”.
proceed in numerical order.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
C2 Left SC Cover
(→P. 375)
C5 Panel Assy
(→P. 377)
A1 B1
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
C1
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
1. Remove one screw (S1: ) 1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate.
2. Slide the Left SC Cover while pushing the dent of Left SC Cover, and remove it. 2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the
screw (S1: ).
3. Remove one screw (S2: ).
Support stand
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks Hook
Hooks
4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the 1. Open Front Cover Assy.
ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand. 2. Remove one screw (S1: ).
Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
Panel Assy
C5
Panel FFC
Grounding
Wire
CN302
FFC Clamps
Panel FFC
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
7.4.3.2 Housing 2
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
Start
A1 Stacker Assy B1 Paper Guide Support C1 Front Cover Assy D1 Front Right Cover
(→P. 380) (→P. 380) (→P. 381) E1 (→P. 381)
E2 Stacker Assy
(→P. 382)
A1 B1
Stacker Assy Paper Guide Support
C1
Front Cover Assy Front Right Cover
D1 E1
Hook
Stacker Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing.
7.4.3.3 Housing 3
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 (→P. 386)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover
D2 E2 F2 (→P. 386)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 C4 A5 C5
Rear Housing Assy Paper Guide Support
D4 D5
Top
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Pull out the paper guide.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding 2. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Paper Guide Support.
interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
A6 C6 C7
Upper Rear Housing Rear Cover Assy
D6
Front Front
Paper Guide
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Upper Rear Housing. 1. Remove the paper guide from the Rear Cover Assy.
B4
Paper Support Assy Front Right Cover
D7 E4 F4
Paper Guide
Hook
1. Remove the paper guide from the Rear Cover Assy. 1. Open Front Cover Assy.
2. Remove one screw (S1: ).
Panel FFC
FFC Clamps
Panel Unit
Front Cover Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ) 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
There is a place to fasten the grounding wire together when fixing the panel
B6 B7
Front Housing Assy Stacker Assy
E6 F6 E7
Stacker Assy
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.
B8 B9
1st Cassette Assy Front Left Housing
E8 E9
1. Remove 1st Cassette Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Left Housing.
Positioning
1. Remove the cable from the connector. 1. Remove the four screws (S8: ), then remove the Front Inner Housing.
2. Remove the two screws (S8: ), then remove the 1st Paper Size Detector Assy.
Set the positioning of cable following the above figure.
Panel Frame
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Panel Frame. 1. Open the Front Cover Assy.
2. Disengage the boss of the Front Cover Assy.
3. Disengage the left hook using a flathead screwdriver.
4. Disengage the right hook, them remove the Front Cover Assy.
Front Housing
F10
Front Housing
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
Sub IS BK Inner Cover
A 15 sec --- 15 sec
Assy
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
B1 C1 Left Ink Pack Cover Assy A1 Sub IS BK Inner Cover Assy D1 Cover Open Sensor (BK)
E1 F1 (→P. 399) (→P. 399) (→P. 401)
E2 IS BK Inner Cover Assy B2 Hinge Guide C2 Link Lever D2 Open Sensor (BK)
(→P. 402) F2 (→P. 400) (→P. 400) (→P. 401)
A1 B1 C1
Sub IS BK Inner Cover Assy Left Ink Pack Cover Assy
E1 F1
z
Sub IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Hook
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Sub IS BK Inner Cover Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
B2 C2
Hinge Guide Link Lever
F2
Link Lever
Hinge Guide Sh
Shaft Dowel
1. Remove the two Hinge Guides from the Left Ink Pack Cover. 1. Remove the two Link Levers from the two dowels of the Left Ink Pack Cover.
Cable
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Sub IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Sub IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
IS BK Inner Guide
Link Lever
Dowel
1. Remove the two Link Levers from the two dowels of the Left Ink Pack Cover.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
B5 C5 Hinge Guide
D5 E5 F5 (→P. 409)
E8 F8 Connector Holder
(→P. 413)
F9 BK CSIC FFC
(→P. 414)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Left Ink Pack Cover Assy IS BK Inner Cover Assy
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
z
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
A3 B3 C3
BK CRCM Board Ink Holder Cover
D3 E3 F3
BK CRCM Board
FFC s
1. Disconnect the two FFCs from the connector of the BK CRCM Board. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.
2. Remove the four screws (S10: ), then remove the BK CRCM Board.
B4 C4 B5 C5
Cover Open Sensor (BK) Hinge Guide
D4 E4 F4 D5 E5 F5
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). 1. Remove the two Hinge Guides from the Left Ink Pack Cover.
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK).
BK CRCM
Board
CN2
Groove
FFC
2. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 4. Release the ink tube (BK) from the guide of the housing.
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
Position the line of the ink tube (BK) against the triangle mark of the housing.
3. Release the ink tube (BK) from the clamp. Install the ink tube (BK) so that its black line is set outside.
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector (CN2) of the BK CRCM Board, then remove the
ferrite core from the Housing.
6. Remove the two screws (S1: ) and the two screws (S11: ), then pull the Ink Holder Unit
(BK) upward to remove it.
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks
Hole
Clamp Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube 4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks.
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit. 5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp. 6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
C7
Ink Supply BK Assy Lower Housing Ink Tube (BK)
D7
1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy Lower Housing. 1. Remove one screw (S12: ), then remove the Ink Tube Assy (BK).
Ferrite Core
Plate
CSIC Spring
During operation in the next step, keep pressing the CSIS spring to prevent it from 1. Disengage the hook fixing the ferrite core of the BK CSIC FFC, and remove the Connector
being shattered. Holder with the BK CSIC FFC.
1. Slide the plate in the direction of the arrow, disengage the two hooks of the plate from the
metal plate, and remove the plate and the CSIC Spring.
Connector Holder
BK CSIC FFC
F9
BK CSIC FFC
Connector Holder
BK CSIC FFC
Connector
2. Remove the BK CSIC FFC from the connector of the Connector Holder.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
B1 C1 Right Ink Pack Cover Assy A1 Sub IS CL Inner Cover D1 Cover Open Sensor (CL)
E1 F1 (→P. 417) (→P. 417) (→P. 419)
A1 B1 C1
Sub IS CL Inner Cover Right Ink Pack Cover Assy
E1 F1
Dowel Cover
Hook
Link
Lever
Sub IS CL Inner
Cover
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Sub IS CL Inner Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
B2 C2
Hinge Guide Link Lever
F2
Link Lever
Dowel
4. Remove the two Hinge Guides from the Right Ink Pack Cover. 1. Remove the two Link Levers from the two dowels of the Right Ink Pack Cover.
Cable
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (CL). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
Hooks
Hook
Sub IS CL Inner
Cover
1. Remove the three screws (S9: ). 1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Sub IS CL Inner Cover.
2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS CL Inner Cover Assy.
IS CL Inner Cover
Link Lever
Dowel
1. Remove the two Link Levers from the two dowels of the Right Ink Pack Cover.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide
Disassembly/Reassembly Adjustment/Inspection Total
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
Cover Open Sensor (CL) A3 CL CRCM Board B3 C3 Ink Holder Unit (Y/M/C)
E3 (→P. 430) (→P. 426) D3 E3 (→P. 426)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right Ink Pack Cover Assy IS CL Inner Cover Assy
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Dowel Cover
Hooks
Link
Lever
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type
IS CL Inner
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C (Black) Cover Assy
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the three screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS CL Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
A3 B3 C3
CL CRCM Board Ink Holder Unit (Y/M/C)
D3 E3 F3
FFCs
CN3
CN5
Ferrite Core
CN2
CL CRCM Board
1. Disconnect the four FFCs from the connector of the CL CRCM Board. 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube
2. Remove the four screws (S10: ), then remove the CL CRCM Board. (Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
2. Release the ink tube (Y/M/C) from the guide of the housing.
Position the guide line of the ink tube (Y/M/C) against the triangle mark of the housing.
Install the ink tube (Y/M/C) so that its line is set outside.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector (Y: CN5, M: CN3, C: CN2) of the CL CRCM
Board.
4. Remove the ferrite core from the housing. (Y/C Only)
C H E C K How to remove the Ink Holder Unit (Y) is explained below. Ink Holder Unit (M/C) C H E C K How to remove the Ink Tube Assy (Y) is explained below. Ink Tube Assy (M)/(C)
P O IN T P O IN T
also can be removed in the same way. also can be removed in the same way.
5. Remove the two screws (S1: ) and the two screws (S11: ), then pull the Ink Holder Unit 1. Remove one screw (S12: ), then remove the Ink Tube Assy (Y).
(Y) upward to remove it.
Y CSIC FFC
Hook
CSIC Spring
Connector Holder
During operation in the next step, keep pressing the CSIS spring to prevent it from C H E C K How to remove the Connector Holder of Yellow is explained below. The Connector
P O IN T
being shattered. Holder of Magenta and Cyan also can be removed in the same way.
1. Slide the plate in the direction of the arrow, displace the two hooks of the plate from the 1. Disengage the hook fixing the ferrite core of the Y CSIC FFC, and remove the Connector
metal plate, and remove the Plate and the CSIC Spring. Holder with the Y CSIC FFC.
Connector Holder
Y CSIC FFC
Connector Holder
Y/M/C CSIC FFC
Connector
2. Remove the Y CSIC FFC from the connector of the Connector Holder.
Cable
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (CL). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
FFCs
Ink Tube
CL CRCM Board
Inside
FFCs
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S10 C.B.SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C
S12 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the four FFCs from the connector of the CL CRCM Board. 1. Release the ink tube.
2. Remove the four screws (S10: ), then remove the CL CRCM Board. 2. Remove the three screws (S1: ) and the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Ink Supply
CL Assy Lower Housing.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
B1 Left Ink Pack Cover Assy A1 Option Upper Rear B11 Ink Supply CL Assy B20 Option Rear Cover
C1 (→P. 435) Housing (→P. 434) C11 (→P. 441) C20 (→P. 447)
B2 IS BK Inner Cover Assy A2 2nd Cassette Assy B12 2nd Bin Unit C21 Option Rear Belt Cover
C2 (→P. 436) (→P. 434) C12 (→P. 441) (→P. 447)
B3 Ink Holder Cover A3 2nd Pick Up Roller B13 Option Right Cover
C3 (→P. 436) (→P. 435) C13 (→P. 442)
A1 A2
Option Upper Rear Housing 2nd Cassette Assy
1. Open the Option Rear Cover. 1. Remove the 2nd Cassette Assy.
2. Remove the three screws (S27: ), then remove the Upper Rear Housing.
A3 B1
2nd Pick Up Roller Left Ink Pack Cover Assy
C1
z
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Hooks Cover Assy
1. Disengage the hook, then remove the 2nd Pick Up Roller. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
B2 B3
IS BK Inner Cover Assy Ink Holder Cover
C2 C3
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.
2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
B4 B5
Cover Open Sensor (BK) Open Sensor (BK)
C4 C5
Cable
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks
Hole
Clamp Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube 4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks.
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit. 5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp. 6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
B7 B8
Right Ink Pack Cover Assy IS CL Inner Cover Assy
C7 C8
Dowel Cover
Hooks
Link
Lever
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type
IS CL Inner
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C (Black) Cover Assy
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the three screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS CL Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
B9 B10
Cover Open Sensor (CL) Open Sensor (CL)
C9 C10
Cable
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (CL). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
B11 B12
Ink Supply CL Assy 2nd Bin Unit
C11 C12
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Relay Unit Arrow
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 1. Remove the two screws (S19: ), then disengage the hooks on the Mounting Plate.
(Y/M/C) from the relay unit. 2. Remove the two screws (S30: ), remove the 2nd Bin Unit from the printer.
2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
B13 B14
Option Right Cover Option Left Cover
C13 C14
1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Right Cover. 1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Left Cover.
B15 B16
Option Rear Fitting Frame 2nd Cassette Assy
C15 C16
1. Remove the two screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Rear Fitting Frame. 1. Remove the 2nd Cassette Assy.
Option Drive
Frame Assy
1. Open the Option Rear Cover. 3. Remove the four screws (S28: ) and one screw (S29: ) fixing the Option Drive Frame
2. Remove the five screws (S12: ) fixing the Cassette Drawers. Assy.
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Drive
Frame Assy
CN14
CN8
Cable Holder
4. Afloat the Option Drive Frame Assy, and remove the cable from the connector (CN8, 6. Remove the Option Drive Frame Assy.
CN14) of the board.
5. Release the cable of CN14 from the Cable Holder.
B18 B19
Option Front Cover 2nd Left Housing & Option Front Frame Assy
C18 C19
Sensor Cable
2nd Left Housing/Option
Front Frame Assy
Clamps
1. Remove the two screws (S2: ), and the two screws (S28: ) then remove the Option Front 1. Release the sensor cable from the four clamps.
Cover. 2. Remove the two screws (S2: ) and the two screws (C28: ) fixing the 2nd Left Housing
and the Option Front Frame Assy.
3. Pull the 2nd Left Housing and the Option Front Frame Assy upward to remove it.
B20
Option Rear Cover Option Rear Belt Cover
C20 C21
Option Rear
Cover Belt
Option Rear
Cover Belt
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
S29 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S29 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S12 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S29: ), then remove the Option Rear Cover Belt. 1. Remove the two screws (S29: ), then remove the two Option Rear Cover Belts.
2. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the Option Rear Cover.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A3 B3 Ink Holder Cover B13 C13 Option Right Cover A13 Option Feed Lever
C3 D3 (→P. 451) D13 (→P. 457) Cover (→P. 456)
A4 B4 Cover Open Sensor (BK) B14 C14 Option Left Cover A14 Option Feed Lever
C4 D4 (→P. 451) D14 (→P. 458) (→P. 457)
A7 B7 Right Ink Pack Cover B17 C17 Option Drive Frame Assy
C7 D7 Assy (→P. 453) D17 (→P. 459)
A8 B8 IS CL Inner Cover Assy D18 Option Rear Frame Assy B18 Connector Assy
C8 D8 (→P. 454) (→P. 463) C18 (→P. 461)
A9 B9 Cover Open Sensor (CL) D19 Connector Assy B19 Upper Connector C19 Lower Connector
C9 D9 (→P. 454) (→P. 463) (→P. 462) (→P. 462)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Left Ink Pack Cover Assy IS BK Inner Cover Assy
C1 D1 C2 D2
z
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
A3 B3 A4 B4
Ink Holder Cover Cover Open Sensor (BK)
C3 D3 C4 D4
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover. 1. Remove one screw (S9: ).
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK).
A5 B5 A6 B6
Open Sensor (BK) Ink Supply BK Assy
C5 D5 C6 D6
Cable
Hole
Hook (long)
Ink Tube (BK)
Clamp
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
sensor. 2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the open sensor (BK).
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the open sensor (BK).
Dowel Cover
CN1
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks Link
Lever
Arrow
No. Screw Type Ink Supply CL
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C Cover Assy
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board. 2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy. 3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
A8 B8 A9 B9
IS CL Inner Cover Assy Cover Open Sensor (CL)
C8 D8 C9 D9
Hooks
Cover Open
Sensor (CL)
Hook
Cable
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Hook (long) Relay Unit Arrow
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
sensor. 2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Open Sensor.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Open Sensor (CL).
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
1. Remove the two screws (S19: ), then disengage the hooks on the Mounting Plate. 1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), then remove the Option Feed Lever Cover.
2. Remove the two screws (S30: ), remove the 2nd Bin Unit from the printer.
A14 B13
Option Feed Lever Option Right Cover
C13 D13
Hole
Spring
Hole
1. Release the Option Feed Lever from the holes of the cover. 1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Right Cover.
2. Remove the Option Feed Lever with the spring.
Make sure to attach the spring as shown above.
B14 B15
Option Left Cover Option Rear Fitting Frame
C14 D14 C15 D15
1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Left Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Rear Fitting Frame.
B16 B17
2nd Cassette Assy Option Drive Frame Assy
C16 D16 C17 D17
1. Remove the 2nd Cassette Assy. 1. Open the Option Rear Cover.
2. Remove the five screws (S12: ) fixing the Cassette Drawers.
Option Drive
Frame Assy
CN14
Option Drive
Frame Assy CN8
Cable Holder
3. Remove the four screws (S28: ) and one screw (S29: ) fixing the Option Drive Frame 4. Afloat the Option Drive Frame Assy, and remove the cable from the connector (CN8,
Assy. CN14) of the board.
5. Release the cable of CN14 from the Cable Holder.
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Connector Assy
CN2
CN1
Board
Option Drive
Frame Assy
6. Remove the Option Drive Frame Assy. 1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN1, CN2) of the board.
2. Slide the Option Drive Frame Assy in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Connector
Assy.
B19
Upper Connector Lower Connector
C19
Cassette Assy
Lower Connector
Upper Connector
Hook Hook
Cassette Assy
Hook
Hook
Cable
Cable
1. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the Upper Connector from the Cassette Assy. 1. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the Lower Connector from the Cassette Assy.
2. Remove the cable from the Upper Connector. 2. Disconnect the cables from the Lower Connector.
CN2
CN1
Cable Holder
CN7 Board
1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN7, CN10) of the board. 1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN1, CN2) of the board.
2. Release the cables from the Cable Holder. 2. Slide the Option Drive Frame Assy in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Connector
3. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the Option Rear Frame Assy. Assy.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
Feed Sensor/
Cassette Paper Size Sensor/
C 30 min 47 sec --- 30 min 47 sec
Paper Detection Sensor/
Hopper Up/down Sensor
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 Left Ink Pack Cover Assy A11 B11 Ink Supply CL Assy B19 C19 Option Feed Lever Cover A19 Option Rear Cover
C1 D1 (→P. 468) C11 D11 (→P. 473) D19 (→P. 479) Sensor (→P. 479)
A2 B2 IS BK Inner Cover Assy A12 B12 2nd Bin Unit B20 C20 Option Feed Lever
C2 D2 (→P. 468) C12 D12 (→P. 474) D20 (→P. 480)
A3 B3 Ink Holder Cover A13 B13 Option Right Cover B21 C21 Option Cassette Ground Plate
C3 D3 (→P. 469) C13 D13 (→P. 474) D21 (→P. 480)
A4 B4 Cover Open Sensor (BK) A14 B14 Option Left Cover B22 Option Rear Frame Assy
C4 D4 (→P. 469) C14 D14 (→P. 475) D22 (→P. 481) a (→P. 467)
A5 B5 Open Sensor (BK) A15 B15 Option Rear Fitting Frame B23 Spur Gear (with E-ring)
C5 D5 (→P. 470) C15 D15 (→P. 475) D23 (→P. 481)
A6 B6 Ink Supply BK Assy A16 B16 2nd Cassette Assy D24 Vertical Roller
C6 D6 (→P. 470) C16 D16 (→P. 476) (→P. 485)
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
a
(→P. 466)
C23
C23 C24
C23 C25 C23 C26 C23
Paper Detection Sensor Cassette Paper Size Sensor Feed Sensor Paper Detection Sensor
(→P. 484) (→P. 483) (→P. 483) (→P. 484)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Left Ink Pack Cover Assy IS BK Inner Cover Assy
C1 D1 C2 D2
z
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
A3 B3 A4 B4
Ink Holder Cover Cover Open Sensor (BK)
C3 D3 C4 D4
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover. 1. Remove one screw (S9: ).
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK).
A5 B5 A6 B6
Open Sensor (BK) Ink Supply BK Assy
C5 D5 C6 D6
Cable
Hole
Hook (long)
Ink Tube (BK)
Clamp
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
sensor. 2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the open sensor (BK).
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the open sensor (BK).
Dowel Cover
CN1
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks Link
Lever
Arrow
No. Screw Type Ink Supply CL
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C Cover Assy
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board. 2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy. 3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
A8 B8 A9 B9
IS CL Inner Cover Assy Cover Open Sensor (CL)
C8 D8 C9 D9
Hooks
Cover Open
Sensor (CL)
Hook
Cable
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Hook (long) Relay Unit Arrow
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
sensor. 2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Open Sensor.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Open Sensor (CL).
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
1. Remove the two screws (S19: ), then disengage the hooks on the Mounting Plate. 1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Right Cover.
2. Remove the two screws (S30: ), remove the 2nd Bin Unit from the printer.
1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Left Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S12: ), then remove the Option Rear Fitting Frame.
1. Remove the 2nd Cassette Assy. 1. Open the Option Rear Cover.
2. Remove the five screws (S12: ) fixing the Cassette Drawers.
Option Drive
Frame Assy
CN14
Option Drive
Frame Assy CN8
Cable Holder
3. Remove the four screws (S28: ) and one screw (S29: ) fixing the Option Drive Frame 4. Afloat the Option Drive Frame Assy, and remove the cable from the connector (CN8,
Assy. CN14) of the board.
5. Release the cable of CN14 from the Cable Holder.
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Rear Frame Assy
Cable Holder
CN7
6. Remove the Option Drive Frame Assy. 1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN7, CN10) of the board.
2. Release the cables from the Cable Holder.
3. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the Option Rear Frame Assy.
A19 B19
Option Rear Cover Sensor Option Feed Lever Cover
C19 D19
Option Rear
Cover Sensor
Cable Connector
1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Option Rear Cover Sensor. 1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), then remove the Option Feed Lever Cover.
2. Disconnect the cables from the connector.
B20 B21
Option Feed Lever Option Cassette Ground Plate
C20 D20 C21 D21
Hole
Spring
Option Cassette Ground Plate
Hole
1. Release the Option Feed Lever from the holes of the cover. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Option Cassette Ground Plate.
2. Remove the Option Feed Lever with the spring.
Make sure to attach the spring as shown above.
B22 B23
Option Rear Frame Assy Spur Gear
D22 D23
Spur Gear
E-ring
Cable Holder
CN7
1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN7, CN10) of the board. 1. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Spur Gear.
2. Release the cables from the Cable Holder.
3. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the Option Rear Frame Assy.
Back
Hook
Hooks
Option Pick Up
Holder Assy
Cable
Connector
Hooks
1. Remove the two screws (S29: ). 1. Disengage the hook and remove the sensor.
2. Disengage the six hooks, then remove the Option Pick Up Holder Assy. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
Feed Sensor
Cassette paper size sensor
Connector
Cable
Connector
Hooks
Cable Hooks
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor. 1. Disengage the hook and remove the sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
Connector Connector
Hooks Hooks
Cable Cable
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor. 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
Vertical Roller
D24
Bush
Vertical Roller
E-ring
& Bush
7.4.3.11 ADF/SCN 1
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover C12 D12 Front ADF Base B12 Left Hinge Assy/
D1 E1 (→P. 488) E12 (→P. 498) Right Hinge Assy
(→P. 497)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover C13 D13 Front ADF Cover
D2 E2 (→P. 488) E13 (→P. 499) B13
Left Hinge Frame/
Right Hinge Frame
A3 B3 C3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit C14 D14 Cable Holder (→P. 497)
D3 E3 (→P. 489) E14 (→P. 500)
B14 ADF Hinge
A4 B4 C4 ADF/SCN Unit C15 D15 ADF PF Support Guide (→P. 498)
D4 E4 (→P. 490) E15 (→P. 500)
B8 C8 ADF Cover Assy D19 ADF Document Size Sensor E19 Sensor Holder Assy
D8 E8 (→P. 494) (→P. 503) (→P. 504)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Right SC Cover
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
ADF/SCN Unit
A4 B4 C4
ADF/SCN Unit
D4 E4
ADF/SCN Unit
Hook
Hook
ADF/SCN Cable
ADF/SCN Cable
(Purple) (CN103)
(With hook) ADF/SCN
Ground Cable
ADF/SCN
Ground Cable
Lower Spring
Hook
ADF/SCN Cable
(USB) (CN104)
1. Separate the upper spring and lower spring. 6. Wrap the ADF/SCN ground cable around the ADF/SCN cable (Purple).
2. Disconnect the following cables from the connector of the Main Board. 7. Fix the ADF/SCN Cables (ADF/SCN ground cable is wrapped condition) to two hooks.
• ADF/SCN Cable (USB) (CN104) 8. Close the ADF/SCN Unit.
• ADF/SCN Cable (Purple) (CN103) (With hook) If the upper spring and the lower spring were separated, even if the ADF / SCN unit is
3. Remove one screw (S1: ), and release the ADF/SCN ground cable. fully extended, the support stand will not automatically open.
4. Release the ADF/SCN cables and ADF/SCN ground cable from the five clamps.
5. Release the ADF/SCN cable (Purple) from hook of the Relay cable cover.
ADF/SCN Unit
B5 C5
Scanner Relay Cable
Markings D5 E5
ADF/SCN Unit
Cable Band
ACN/SCN Cable
9. Remove the six screws (S1: ). 1. Release the ACN/SCN Cables from the two hooks.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by a triangle mark. 2. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the cable band.
P O IN T
3. Disconnect the ACN/SCN cables from the following connectors of the ADF/SCN board.
• ADF/SCN cable (USB) (CN458)
10.Pull the ADF/SCN Unit upward to remove it. • ADF/SCN cable (Purple) (CN422) (With hook)
4. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the ADF/SCN ground cable.
5. Release the ACN/SCN cables and ADF/SCN ground cable from the cable guide.
CN465
ADF/SCN Board
No. Screw Type
S12 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the cables and FFCs from the connector (CN21, CN22, CN31, CN32, CN36, 2. Remove all the cables and FFCs from the ADF/SCN Harness Holder.
CN37, CN38, CN130, CN131, CN464, CN465) of the ADF/SCN Board. 3. Remove the three screws (S12: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Harness Holder.
CN21 CN22
Cables and
Grounding Wire of
the CN36, CN37,
CN38
FFC (CN464)
FFC (CN465)
Double-side tape
Check the following points, and route the cables and FFCs. Set the ferrite core of each cable in the position shown above.
Pull out the FFC (CN464) from the slit of the ADF/SCN Harness Holder. Set the surplus of the cable and the grounding wire in the position shown above.
Stick the FFCs with the double side tapes.
B7 C7 B8 C8
ADF Unit ADF Cover Assy
D7 E7 D8 E8
Flathead
Hook Screwdriver
Dowel
ADF Unit
Dowel
Left Hinge
Right Hinge
SCN Unit
4. Open the ADF Unit. 1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ADF Cover Assy.
5. Pull the ADF Unit upward to remove it while pushing up the hooks fixing the left hinge and
right hinge from the bottom of the SCN Unit with the flathead screwdriver.
B9 C9 B10 C10
ASF Cover Screw Cover Seal
D9 E9 D10 E10
1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ASF Cover Assy. 1. Remove the two Screw Cover Seals.
Hooks
Rear ADF Cover Assy
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S12: ) and the screw (S1: ). 2. Disengage the three hooks, and remove the Rear ADF Cover Assy.
B12 B13
Left Hinge Assy/Right Hinge Assy Left Hinge Frame/Right Hinge Frame
Right ADF
Hinge Frame
1. Remove the four screws (S17: ) and the screw (S16: ), and remove the left ADF Hinge 1. Remove the four screws (S18: ), then remove the Left ADF Hinge Frame from the Left
Assy. ADF Hinge.
2. Remove the four screws (S17: ), then remove the Right ADF Hinge Assy. 2. Remove the four screws (S18: ), then remove the Right ADF Hinge Frame from the Right
ADF Hinge.
B14 C12
ADF Hinge Front ADF Base
D12 E12
Bottom
1. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the Front ADF Base.
Hooks
ADF Cover
Assy
Hook
Hooks
No. Screw Type
S12 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
S14 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-W2-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the three screws (S12: ) and the screw (S14: ). 2. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the Front ADF Cover.
C14 C15
Cable Holder ADF PF Support Guide
D14 E14 D15 E15
Grounding Wire
Cable Holder
Dowel
Dowel
1. Release the cables of the grounding wire and the Top ADF Document Support Assy from 1. Disengage the two dowels, and then remove the ADF PF Support Guide.
the Cable Holder.
2. Remove the screw (S8: ), then remove the Cable Holder.
FFC
Hook Cables
Hook
1. Disengage the two hooks and separate the ADF Hinge Guide. 2. Release the cables and FFCs from the ADF Hinge Guide.
Route the cable without slackness when installing the ADF Hinge Guide.
Take care not to catch the cables during installation.
Cables and
Grounding Wire Grounding Wire
Cable Holder
1. Release the cables of the Top ADF Document Support Assy. 4. Remove the screw (S15: ).
2. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the grounding wire. 5. Remove the shaft of the Top ADF Document Support Assy from the hole of the Right ADF
3. Release the cables of the grounding wire and the Top ADF Document Support Assy from Base Gear Cover.
the Cable Holder. 6. Pull out the cables and the grounding wire through the hole of the ADF Base Unit, and
remove the Top ADF Document Support Assy.
ADF Document
Size Sensor
Connector
Hooks
Cable
No. Screw Type
S13 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the three screws (S12: ), then remove the Bottom ADF Document Support. 1. Disengage the four hook, then remove the two ADF Document Size Sensors.
Route the cables of the Top ADF Document Support Assy through the Top ADF 2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
Document Support Assy as shown above.
ADF Document
Size Sensor
Connector
Cable
1. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the Sensor Holder Assy. 1. Disengage the four hook, then remove the two ADF Document Size Sensors.
2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
7.4.3.12 ADF/SCN 2
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
B1 ASF Cover
(→P. 507)
A1 B1
ADF Cover Assy ASF Cover
F1
Dowel
Dowel
1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ASF Cover Assy.
C1
ADF Pad Assy ADF PF Support Guide
D1
Dowels
Dowel
Hook
Dowel
Hook
1. Open the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Disengage the two dowels, and then remove the ADF PF Support Guide.
2. Disengage the two hooks and dowels, then remove the ADF Pad Assy.
1mm 1mm
ADF/Scanner Unit
1. Open the ADF/Scanner unit. Install the Document Mat Cover Assy in the following procedure.
2. Remove the Document Mat Cover Assy. 1. Peel off the Protection material of Double side tape of Document MAT cover Assy.
2. Put the Document MAT cover Assy on Scanner glass.(Note the following points)
Put scanner mat cover Assy in the direction of the above figure.
Separate the top and left sides of the scanner mat cover 1 mm from the scanner glass frame.
3. Close the ADF/SCN Unit slowly, then install the ADF/SCN Document MAT cover
Assy to ADF Unit.
LD Roller
LD Roller
F2 LD Roller
Hook
ADF Pick Up Roller
Assy ADF Housing Upper
Hook
ADF Cover
Open Lever
Bearing
Hooks
Hooks
1. Remove the four screws (S12: ). 3. Extract the LD Roller in the direction of the arrow.
2. Remove the ADF Pick Up Roller Assy from the six hooks of the ADF housing upper. Set the shaft of the ADF cover open lever in the bearing.
Confirm the behavior of the ADF Cover Open Lever after installing it.
Extension Spring
Stopper
Hooks
1. Remove the Extension Spring from the two hooks. 1. Slide the ADF Pick Up Roller Assy to direction of arrow while pushing down the stopper,
then release the hook.
2. Remove the ADF Pick Up Roller Assy.
7.4.3.13 ADF/SCN 3
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 A2 B2
ADF Cover Assy Front ADF Base
Dowel
Dowel
Bottom
1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the Front ADF Base.
Hooks
ADF Cover
Assy
Hook
Hooks
No. Screw Type
S12 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
S14 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-W2-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the three screws (S12: ) and the screw (S14: ). 2. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the Front ADF Cover.
7.4.3.14 ADF/SCN 4
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A2 B2 C2 ASF Cover
D2 E2 (→P. 518)
D7 Document Stopper
E7 (→P. 522)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
ADF Cover Assy ASF Cover
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dowel
Dowel
1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ASF Cover Assy.
A3 B3 C3 B4 C4
Screw Cover Seal Rear ADF Cover Assy
D3 E3 D4 E4
1. Remove the two Screw Cover Seals. 1. Remove the two screws (S12: ) and the screw (S1: ).
Hooks
Hook
2. Disengage the three hooks, and remove the Rear ADF Cover Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the Rear ADF Base from the Rear ADF Cover.
C5
Rear ADF Base Screw Cover Seal
D5 E5
1. Remove the screw (S12: ), then remove the Rear ADF Base from the Rear ADF Cover. 1. Remove the Screw Cover Seal.
Back
Dowel
Dowel
Document Stopper
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE(P4), SCREW, 3X10, F/ZN-3C
S13 C.SHOULDER S-TITE, SCREW, 3X5
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ) and the screw (S13: ), then remove the Right ADF Cover 1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Document Stopper.
Assy.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 (→P. 526)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover
D2 E2 F2 (→P. 526)
F5 PCB Head Relay Board (with B5 PCB Relay CRCM D5 Power Supply Unit
Mounting Plate) (→P. 532) Board (→P. 529) (→P. 531)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4
Wi-Fi Board Disconnect the FFCs
F4
Cable
Head Relay FFC Head FFC
Connector
1. Disconnect the cables from the connector of the Wi-Fi Board. 1. Remove the five Head FFCs and Head Relay FFCs from the connector of the PCB Head
2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Wi-Fi Board. Relay Board.
B5 C4
PCB Relay CRCM Board Relay Harness Cover
Clamp
Relay Cables
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect all the FFCs from the connectors of the PCB Relay CRCM Board. 1. Release the ADF/SCN Cable (Purple) from the hook of the Relay Harness Cover.
2. Remove the two screws (S1: ), remove the PCB Relay CRCM Board. 2. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from the clamp.
3. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from hook of Relay Harness Cover.
4. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Relay Harness Cover.
C5
PCB Mechanism Relay Board Rear Housing Assy
D4 E4
Top
PCB Mechanism Relay Board
1. Disconnect the all cables and FFCs from the connectors on the PCB Mechanism Relay 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
Board. 2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding
2. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Mechanism Relay Board. interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
Connector
Clamps
Cable
Connector Cover
1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Connector Cover.
2. Release the cable from the two clamps.
3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it.
Mounting Plate
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Head Relay Board (with Mounting 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the two Mounting Plates from the PCB Head
Plate). Relay Board.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 (→P. 536)
A8 PCB Rom
B8 (→P. 542)
B9 Connector Cover
(→P. 542)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Rear Housing Assy PS Harness Holder
D4 E4 F4 D5 E5 F5
Top
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PS Harness Holder.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding
interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
Grounding Wire
FFC Clamps
CN106
CN601
Panel Cable
Guide
1. Disconnect the following cables and FFCs from the Main Board. 3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the panel cable guide.
• Panel FFC (CN302) 4. Remove the screw (S1: ), then release the grounding wire.
• USB Host Cable (CN106) 5. Remove the two FFC clamps, then release the panel FFC and grounding wire.
• Wi-Fi Module Cable (CN102) 6. Disconnect the following cables and FFCs.
• Power Supply Unit Cable (CN601) (With hook) • Head Relay FFC (CN101, CN102, CN103, CN104, CN109)
• MB CSIC FFC (CN707) • CRCM Relay FFC (CN1)
2. Insert the MB CSIC FFC into the hole of the housing. • Relay Cable (CN401, CN402, CN403) (With hook)
• ADF/SCN Cable (USB) (CN104)
• ADF/SCN Cable (Purple) (CN103) (With hook)
Ferrite Core
ADF/SCN Cable
(Purple)
7. Remove the FFC clamp and Ferrite core, then release the head relay FFC. 12.Remove the two screws (S1: ), remove the Main Board Unit in the direction of the arrow.
Make sure to set the Ferrite core following the above figure.
8. Release the ADF/SCN cable (Purple) form the hook of Relay Harness Holder.
9. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from clamp.
10.Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the relay harness cover.
11.Remove the two relay cables (CN501, CN502 (with hook)) from the Main Board.
Shield Plate MB
Upper Assy
Connect the head relay FFC by the following procedure. 1. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), then remove the Shield Plate MB Upper Assy.
1. Remove the FFC clamp and acetate tape.
2. Remove the two screws, then remove the relay board Assy.
3. Insert the two tabs of the frame of the relay board Assy into the holes on the frame.
4. Connect the head relay FFC. (Take care not to connect obliquely.)
The head relay FFC is stored around the CR Ferrite Core Holder. Pull out the head relay FFC
after installing the Main Board Unit.
A8 B8 B9
PCB Rom Connector Cover
ROM Support
PCB ROM
1. Disengage the hooks by pressing the ROM support, and pull the PCB ROM upward to 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Connector Cover.
remove it.
B10 B11
PDL-FAX Assy Main Board
Main Board
Main Board
PDL-FAX Assy
CN107
CN203
1. Disconnect the two FFCs from the connectors of the Main Board.
2. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the PDL-FAX Assy.
C8
FAX Board Assy PDL SD Card
D8 E8
Holder
FFC
PDL SD Card
CN1
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connectors (CN1). 1. Slide the holder in the direction of the arrow.
2. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the FAX Board Assy. 2. Raise the holder, then remove the PDL SD Card.
Main Board
CR Ferrite Core
Holder PDL Board Assy
CN705
CN404
CN102
CN703
CN704 FFC
CN702
CN701
1. Disconnect the FFCs from the connectors (CN404, CN701, CN702, CN704, CN705) 1. Disconnect the FFCs from the connectors of the PDL Board Assy.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the CR Ferrite Core Holder. 2. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A6 Stacker Assy
B6 (→P. 551)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
Panel FFC
FFC Clamps
Panel Unit
Front Cover Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ) 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
There is a place to fasten the grounding wire together when fixing the panel
A5 B5 A6 B6
Front Right Cover Stacker Assy
Stacker Assy
Hook
A7 B7 A8 B8
Front Housing Assy 1st Cassette Assy
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Remove 1st Cassette Assy.
A9 A10
Front Left Housing Humidity Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Connector
Hook
Clamp
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Left Housing. 1. Turn over the sheet, then remove the sponge of the Humidity Sensor.
2. Release the cable of the Humidity Sensor and the 1st Paper Size Detector Assy from the
clamp and the hook of the housing.
When routing the cable of the 1st paper size detection Assy, make sure that the
positioning of the cable is in front of the hook.
Hooks
Humidity Sensor
3. Remove the Humidity Sensor while pushing the fixing hook of Humidity sensor by using 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing.
the small flat-head driver.
4. Disconnect the cable from Humidity sensor.
B10 B11
Right Ink Pack Cover Assy IS CL Inner Cover Assy
Dowel Cover
Hooks
Link
Lever
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type
IS CL Inner
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C (Black) Cover Assy
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the three screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS CL Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
B12 B13
Cover Open Sensor (CL) Open Sensor (CL)
Cable
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (CL). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
B14 B15
Ink Supply CL Assy Right Housing
Right Housing
Ink Tube Hook Sensor Cable Ink Supply CL Assy
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Relay Unit Arrow
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Right Housing.
(Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
B16
USB Host Assy
CN106
Main Board
Cable
Clamps
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN106) of the Main Board.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ).
3. Release the cable from the four clamps, then remove the USB Host Assy.
Route the USB cable through the hook of the USB Connector Assy.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
Decompression Pump
C 23 min 23 sec --- 23 min 23 sec
Unit (Full side)
Decompression Pump
D 23 min 19 sec --- 23 min 19 sec
Unit (Home side)
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
StartStart
Preparation Preparation work before C H E C K Perform the “Preparation work before repair
work before repair Maintenance Unit “Maintenance Unit” when the Maintenance
repair P O IN T
(→P. 347) Unit is replaced.
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover
D1 E1 (→P. 561)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover
D2 E2 (→P. 561)
B7 Front Right Housing E11 Rear Housing Assy C7 Duplex Print Assy C10 Decompression Pump Unit
E7 (→P. 565) (→P. 576) D7 (→P. 573) (Full side) (→P. 575)
B8 Front Middle Frame E12 Maintenance Box Holder C8 Mounting Plate Assy
E8 (→P. 565) (→P. 577) D8 (→P. 574)
B9 Right Ink Pack Cover Assy E13 MB CSIC Assy C9 Rear ASF Unit D10 Decompression Pump Unit
E9 (→P. 565) (→P. 577) D9 (→P. 574) (Home side) (→P. 576)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4
Ink End Sensor Front Right Cover
E4
Connector
Connector
Hooks
Hook
1. Disengage the hook and remove the Ink End Sensor. 1. Open Front Cover Assy.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Ink End Sensor. 2. Remove one screw (S1: ).
B5 B6
Stacker Assy 1st Cassette Assy
E5 E6
Stacker Assy
B7 B8
Front Right Housing Front Middle Frame
E7 E8
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing. 1. Remove the four screws (S7: ), then remove the Front Middle Frame.
B9 B10
Right Ink Pack Cover Assy Maintenance Unit
E9 E10
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C Screwdriver
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Insertion Hole
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Insert the screwdriver into the hole and drive the three screws fixing the Maintenance Unit
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). until run idle the screw.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, C H E C K Release the CR lock, then move the CR Unit to center before removing the Maintenance
P O IN T
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy. Unit.
The screws are not removed because there is a screw clamp.
Tighten the screw which is inside of the triangle mark.
Use the screw driver whose shaft length is more than 25 cm to access the screw from the top.
Tighten the screws in numerical order as shown in the picture.
Maintenance Unit
C4
Relay Harness Cover
D4
Clamp
Maintenance Unit
Dowel
Relay Harness Cover Hook
2.
Relay Cables
2. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Release the ADF/SCN Cable (Purple) from the hook of the Relay Harness Cover.
3. Remove Maintenance Box. 2. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from the clamp.
4. Slide the Maintenance unit rightward, and disengage the positioning dowel. 3. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from hook of Relay Harness Cover.
5. Pull the Maintenance Unit forward. 4. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Relay Harness Cover.
Grounding Wire
Relay Cable
Hook Lumiler,
Clamp
Cable Holder
CN16
Relay Cable
CN15 CN44 CN11
1. Disconnect the five Relay cables from the PCB Mechanism Relay Board. 2. Remove the cable of front side (around the cable holder) by the following procedure.
2-1. Release the two hooks of lumiler, then open the lumiler .
2-2. Release the clamp.
2-3. Disconnect the four cables (CN11, CN15, CN16, CN44) from the PCB Mechanism
Relay Board.
2-4. Release the cable from the Cable Holder.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
ADF/SCN Cable
(CN103, CN104)
SCN ground cable
Clamp
CN18
CN41
CN43
CN46
CN47
CN42
CN8
CN59
CN9 CN7
CN14
CN45
CN32
CN19 CN58
CN10
3. Disconnect the cables of rear side(1) by the following procedure. 4. Disconnect the cables of rear side(1) by the following procedure.
3-1. Disconnect the ADF/SCN cable from the connector (CN103, CN104) of the main 4-1. Release the cable from three clam
board. 4-2. Disconnect the ten cables and a FFC from the following connector of the PCB
3-2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the SCN ground cable. mechanism Relay Board.
3-3. Disconnect five relay cables from connector (CN8, CN9, CN14, CN19, CN32) of the ・CN7 ・CN41 ・CN45 ・CN58
PCB Mechanism Relay Board. ・CN10 ・CN42 ・CN46 ・CN59
3-4. Release the cable from the two clamps. ・CN18 ・CN43 ・CN47
4-3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Ground cable.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
Clamp 1
Clamp 2
Clamp 3
CN46
CN18
CN41
CN59
CN58
CN10
5. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Rotate the cables by the following procedure.
Mounting Plate). 1. Route the cable to the following specified clamp, then connect the cable to PCB
Mechanism Relay board.
Cable (CN10: Black):Clamp 3 > Clamp 2 > Clamp 1
Cable (CN58: Yellow):Clamp 2 > Clamp 1
Cable (CN59: Yellow):Clamp 2 > Clamp 1
Cable (CN46: Black):Clamp 2 > Clamp 1
Cable (CN41: White):Clamp 1
Cable (CN18: White):Clamp 1
Cable (CN43: Black):Clamp 1
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
Clamp 1
Clamp 2
CN47
Clamp 3
Clamp4
Clamp2 Clamp5
Clamp3
CN7
CN42 CN8
CN45
CN14
CN9
CN32 CN19
2. Rotate the ground cable to clamp, then fix it by screw (S1). 4. Route the cables to the following specified clamp, then connect the cables to the
3. Connect the following cable and FFC to the PCB Mechanism Relay Board. PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
FFC (CN7: White) Cable (CN14: White):Clamp 2 > Clamp 4
Cable (CN42: Black) Cable (CN32: Red):Clamp 4
Cable (CN45: White) Cable (CN8: White:Clamp 3 > Clamp 4
Cable (CN47: Black) Cable (CN9: White:Clamp 4 > Clamp 5
Cable (CN19: White:Clamp 4 > Clamp 5
Note the following points when you rotate the cable (CN19).
• Set the positioning of the cable at left side (Home position side) of clamp 4.
• Set the ferrite core of the cable to between clamp5 and ferrite core support.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
Lumiler
Clamp
CN16
5. Route the cables to Cable Holder following the above figure, then connect the 6. Route the cable(CN16) following the above figure, then connect the cable to PCB
cables to PCB Mechanism Relay Board. Mechanism Relay Board.
Cable (CN11: White):four hooks > Clamp 7. Set the hook of Lumiler to Cable Holder, then fix it.
Cable (CN44: Red):four hooks > Clamp 8. Connect the five relay cables to PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
Cable (CN15: White:three hooks > Clamp
C6 C7
Rear Housing Assy Duplex Print Assy
D6 D7
Top
Duplex Print Assy
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding 2. Remove the Duplex Print Assy.
interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
C8 C9
Mounting Plate Assy Rear ASF Unit
D8 D9
Top
Grounding Wire
Clamp
Cable
Cable (CN41)
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy. 1. Disconnect the two cables from the connectors.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then release the Grounding Wire.
3. Release the cables and the grounding wire from the clamp.
Ink Supply
Unit
Groove
4. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Rear ASF Unit. 1. Pull out the pump tube from the Ink Supply Unit.
2. Release the pump tube from the two wire saddles and the two clamps.
3. Disconnect the motor cable from the relay connector.
4. Release the cable from the groove.
5. Remove the two screws (S20: ), the screw (S12: ), and the screw (S16: ), then remove
the Decompression Pump Unit (Full side).
Top
Ink Supply
Unit
Wire Saddles
Groove
Clamp
1. Pull out the pump tube from the Ink Supply Unit. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Release the pump tube from the two wire saddles and the clamp. 2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding
3. Disconnect the motor cable from the relay connector. interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
4. Release the cable from the groove.
5. Remove the two screws (S20: ), the screw (S12: ), and the screw (S16: ), then remove
the Decompression Pump Unit (Home side).
Hook
Hook
Hook of
Stationary Plate
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the FFC and the ferrite core from the Maintenance Box Holder.
2. Remove the screw (S19: ), and disengage the hook of the stationary plate from the 2. Remove the two screws (S12: ), then remove the MB CSIC Assy.
Maintenance Box Holder.
3. Remove the screw (S1: ).
4. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the Main Board.
5. Slide the Maintenance Box Holder forward to discharge the four hooks, then remove the
Maintenance Box Holder.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B11 Right Ink Pack Cover Assy C13 Ink Supply Unit
(→P. 581) (→P. 586) (Reassembling) (→P. 595)
C3
A4 B4 Move the Panel Assy B12 IS CL Inner Cover Assy C14 Installing the Leak Check
(→P. 582) (→P. 586) Jig (→P. 598)
C4
A5 B5 Front Right Cover B13 Cover Open Sensor (CL) C15 Preparation before
(→P. 583) (→P. 587) Adjustment (→P. 600)
C5
A6 B6 Stacker Assy B14 Open Sensor (CL) C16 Adjustment after replacing
(→P. 583) (→P. 587) the Ink Supply Unit
C6
(→P. 600)
A7 B7 Front Housing Assy B15 Ink Supply CL Assy
(→P. 584) (→P. 588) C17 Leak Check Judgment
C7
(→P. 601)
C8 Magnet Holder Assy B16 Right Housing
(→P. 590) (→P. 588)
C H E C K Ink Supply Unit needs a special reassembly
P O IN T procedure.
C9 Ink Holder Cover B17 Ink Tube Assy (CL)
Therefore, make sure to reassemble the Ink supply
(→P. 590) (→P. 589)
Unit following the above flowchart.
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
C1 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
Panel FFC
FFC Clamps
Panel Unit
Front Cover Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ) 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
There is a place to fasten the grounding wire together when fixing the panel
A5 B5 A6 B6
Front Right Cover Stacker Assy
C5 C6
Stacker Assy
Hook
A7 B7 A8 B8
Front Housing Assy Upper Middle Housing
C7
Lin
Ink Tube
Guide
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Release the ink tubes from the guide of the Upper Middle Housing.
2. Remove the two screws (S33: ), then remove the Upper Middle Housing.
Align the edge of the Upper Middle Housing to the line of the ink tube,.
B9 B10
Clip the Ink Tube Assy (CL) Ink Holder Cover
1. Clip the Ink Tube Assy (CL) by Tube clip. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.
C H E C K Ink tube Assy (CL) must do the clip at a position near three ream joint.
P O IN T
B11 B12
Right Ink Pack Cover Assy IS CL Inner Cover Assy
Dowel Cover
Hooks
Link
Lever
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type
IS CL Inner
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C (Black) Cover Assy
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the three screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS CL Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
B13 B14
Cover Open Sensor (CL) Open Sensor (CL)
Cable
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (CL). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
B15 B16
Ink Supply CL Assy Right Housing
Right Housing
Ink Tube Hook Sensor Cable Ink Supply CL Assy
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Relay Unit Arrow
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Right Housing.
(Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
Clamp
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube 3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Ink Tube Assy (CL).
(Y/M/C) from the Ink Supply Unit.
2. Remove the clamp.
Magnet
Holder Assy
1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the Magnet Holder Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.
C H E C K Before performing this operation, release the CR lock, then move the CR Unit to the
P O IN T
service position
If Magnet Holder is not removed, ink spill is occurred when removing the Ink Tube joint
from Printhead.
Therefore, make sure to remove the Magnet holder when removing the Ink tube joint from
printhead.
Make sure not to put the Magnet Holder to near the Ink Tube Joint after removing it.
Clamps
FFC
1. Remove the screws (S4: ) and the screw (S5: ), then remove the ink tube connector. 4. Disengage the hook, then release the ink tubes from the upper supply tube holder.
2. Hook the ink tube connector on the hook on the frame. 5. Release the ink tubes from the three clamps.
3. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the CR encoder sensor. 6. Disengage the hook at each one side with flathead screwdriver, and remove the tube holder.
Clamp
Groove
Clamp
7. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 10.Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit. (Y/M/C) from the Ink Supply Unit.
8. Release the ink tube (BK) from the clamp. 11.With the ink tube passed through the clamp, remove the clamp.
9. Fix the ink tube (BK) in the groove of the housing. 12.Fix the ink tube (Y/M/C) in the housing.
Ink End
Sensor (Y) Ink End
Sensor (BK)
Ink End
Sensor (M)
Ink End
Sensor (C)
Duct Part
Tube of the
Decompression Pump
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
13.Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Ink End Sensor. 15.Remove the two screws (S1: ).
14.Pull out the two tubes from the decompression pump unit from the Ink Supply Unit. 16.Remove the Ink Supply Unit while releasing the duct part.
Bottom
C H E C K Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Printhead by using the Cleaning stick, Ink Supply Unit (ASP) has Jig Tube and Cover Joint.
P O IN T
because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly. When installing the ink supply unit, refer to the following procedures and remove them
before mounting on the product.
If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Printhead, Ink Leak Check can not perform
Removing the Jig Tube
correctly.
Therefore cleaning the ink surely. 1. Remove the four Jig Tube form Ink Supply Unit.
Be careful as sending liquid may drips during jig tube removing.
Ink Supply
Connection Part
Cover Joint
Removing the Cover Joint 1. Install the Inn Supply Unit, and fix it with two screws.
1. Remove the cover joint from the ink supply connection part of the Inn Supply Unit (ASP).
Make sure to put down plastic sheet or cloth, because shipping liquid may drop from Ink
tube when removing the Cover Joint.
If you remove the Cover Joint to an upward direction, Ink Supply Unit and other parts may
dirty by dropped shipping liquid from Ink Tube Connector.
Therefore, make sure to remove the Cover Joint to a downward direction.
Ink End
Sensor (Y) Ink End
Sensor (BK)
Ink End
Sensor (M)
Ink End
Sensor (C)
Ink Tubes
Clamp
2. Connect the cable to the Ink End Sensor. 4. Release the ink tubes (Y/M/C) from the Upper Middle Housing.
3. Install the two pump tubes to the Ink Supply Unit. 5. Install the clamp.
6. Rotate the connection part by 90 degrees in a clockwise, and install the three ink tubes (Y/
M/C) to the Ink Supply Unit.
Hooks
Clamps
Groove
Upper Supply Hook
Tube Holder
Ink Tube
Clamp
7. Release the ink tube (BK) from the groove of the housing. 10.Install the tube holder to the ink tube.
8. Install the ink tube (BK) to the clamp. 11.Fix the ink tube on three clamps.
9. Rotate the connection part by 90 degrees in a clockwise, and install the ink tube (BK) to the 12.Install the ink tube to the upper supply tube holder, and fix it with hook.
Ink Supply Unit.
Make sure FFC cables to secure/routed properly with the top side of the clamps.
10mm 10mm
90°
90°
C H E C K In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to 1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the ink tube connector of the Print Head.
P O IN T
assembly mistake The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.
Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink
Tube to Printhead.
Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds 2. Install the ink tube connector to the Print Head.
until the fold angle become 90 degrees
Ink leak measurement jig installation Ink leak measurement jig installation
Ink Tube
Connector
5. 5.
7. 7. FFC
Markings
10 Magnet
Holder Assy
8. 8.
Make sure to use the torque screwdriver to tighten the screws in the next step. Use the 9. Connect the FFC to the connector of the CR encoder sensor.
following torque. 10.Install the Magnet Holder Assy with the screw (S3: ).
0.35 ± 0.03 N·m
3. Tighten the two screws (S4) at the front side of the ink tube connector by specified torque.
4. Put a marking on the screw.
5. Loosen the screw halfway from the mark.
6. Tighten the screw again by specified torque. (It is tightened from the marked position.)
7. Check the ink tube connector has no backlash.
8. Tighten the screw(S5) at the rearward.
Preparation before Adjustment Adjustment after replacing the Ink Supply Unit
C15 C16
1. Wrap the front cover open sensor with tape, and disable the sensor function. 1. Select the Adjustment: MENU from the service support mode menu.
2. Install the ink pack and the Maintenance Box. 2. Select "After Unit Repair Operation:MENU" from the adjustment menu.
3. Start the printer in service support mode. (Refer to Service Support Mode (p. 83)) 3. Execute the “B81 I/S Unit Replace Sequence”.
Wrap the front cover sensor with tape surely.
(When the adhesive tape peels off, the CR unit unintentionally moving.)
1. Perform the Ink Leak Check based on the determination criteria of the INK LEAK CHECK
(p. 278).
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A5 B5 C5 Power Supply Unit B15 D15 PW Drive Shutter C15 APG Drive Sensor
D5 E5 (→P. 606) E15 (→P. 612) (→P. 613)
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Rear Housing Assy Power Supply Unit
D4 E4 D5 E5
Top
Connector
Clamps
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding 2. Release the cable from the two clamps.
interference with the Duplex Print Assy. 3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it.
A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7
Left Ink Pack Cover Assy IS BK Inner Cover Assy
D6 E6 D7 E7
z
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9
Ink Holder Cover Cover Open Sensor (BK)
D8 E8 D9 E9
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover. 1. Remove one screw (S9: ).
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK).
Cable
Hole
Hook (long)
Ink Tube (BK)
Clamp
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
sensor. 2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the open sensor (BK).
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the open sensor (BK).
CL CRCM Hook
Board
Hooks
Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks. 1. Release the cable from the hook of the Left Housing.
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board. 2. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Left Housing.
6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
PF Brush Assy
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy.
Cable
PW Drive Shutter
Connector
Hole
Relay Connector
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 1. Release the cable of the PW Drive Shutter from the clamp.
• Align the triangle mark on the left APG cam with the triangle mark on the spur gear 14.4 on 2. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
the APG Drive Assy. At this point, make sure the mark on the combination gear can be seen 3. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the PW Drive Shutter.
through the hole on the APG Drive Assy.
• Insert the pin on the upper paper guide into the groove on the release shaft holder of the APG
Drive Assy.
C15
APG Drive Sensor APG Motor Assy
D16 E16
Clamp
Connector
Connector
1. Disengage the four hooks from the APG Drive Sensor. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG Encoder sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG motor.
3. Release the cable of the clamp from the APG motor.
Hook
4. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the APG Motor Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ).
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the APG Motor Sensor Holder.
APG Encoder
E18
APG Encoder
Frame
Positioning Points
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Preparation Preparation work before repair A10 Print Head (Preparation before
work before
repair Print Head reassembly)
(→P. 346) (→P. 624)
A1 A2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
Panel FFC
FFC Clamps
Panel Unit
Front Cover Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ) 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
There is a place to fasten the grounding wire together when fixing the panel
A5 A6
Front Right Cover Stacker Assy
Stacker Assy
Hook
A7 A8
Front Housing Assy Magnet Holder Assy
Magnet
Holder Assy
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the Magnet Holder Assy.
C H E C K Before performing this operation, release the CR lock, then move the CR Unit to the
P O IN T
service position
If Magnet Holder is not removed, ink spill is occurred when removing the Ink Tube joint
from Printhead.
Therefore, make sure to remove the Magnet holder when removing the Ink tube joint from
printhead.
Make sure not to put the Magnet Holder to near the Ink Tube Joint after removing it.
Print head
A9
Print Head
Hooks
FFC
Head FFC
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and the screw (S5: ), then remove the ink tube connector. 4. Remove the three screws (S6: ). then remove the Print Head.
2. Hook the ink tube connector on the hook on the frame. 5. Disconnect the four Head FFCs from the connector of the Print Head.
3. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the CR encoder sensor.
A10 A11
Print Head (Preparation before reassembly) Installing the Print Head
Head FFC
Head FFC
Seal Joint Head
Wiping area
FFC
2 Print head
1
C H E C K Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning Follow the procedure below to install the Print Head.
P O IN T
stick, because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly. 1.Connect the four Head FFCs to the connector of the Print Head.
2. Press the Print Head in the direction of the arrow in order, set it to the CR Unit, and
If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform fix it with the three screws (S6).
correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely. 3. Connect the FFC to the connector of the CR encoder sensor.
Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused.
Check the seal joint head is not double-installed.
Check the seal joint head is inserted all the way.
Check the foreign object does not adhere on the seal joint head.
10mm 10mm
90°
90°
C H E C K In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to 1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the ink tube connector of the Print Head.
P O IN T
assembly mistake The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.
Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink
Tube to Printhead.
Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds 2. Install the ink tube connector to the Print Head.
until the fold angle become 90 degrees
Ink leak measurement jig installation Ink leak measurement jig installation
Ink Tube
Connector
5. 5.
7. 7. FFC
Markings
10 Magnet
Holder Assy
8. 8.
Make sure to use the torque screwdriver to tighten the screws in the next step. Use the 9. Connect the FFC to the connector of the CR encoder sensor.
following torque. 10.Install the Magnet Holder Assy with the screw (S3: ).
0.35 ± 0.03 N·m
3. Tighten the two screws (S4) at the front side of the ink tube connector by specified torque.
4. Put a marking on the screw.
5. Loosen the screw halfway from the mark.
6. Tighten the screw again by specified torque. (It is tightened from the marked position.)
7. Check the ink tube connector has no backlash.
8. Tighten the screw(S5) at the rearward.
A13 A14
Confirmation after replace the Print Head Preparation before Adjustment
Step 1 Cap
Ink System
Step 2
In this printer, the cap of the ink system follows the inclination of the Print Head. However, if 1. Wrap the front cover open sensor with tape, and disable the sensor function.
hardened ink is accumulated on the cap, capping may not be done properly and printing failure 2. Install the ink pack and the Maintenance Box.
may result. After the adjustment is complete, make sure to perform the operation check of the
3. Start the printer in service support mode. (Refer to Service Support Mode (p. 83))
cap following the procedure below.
Wrap the front cover sensor with tape surely.
1. Push the cap of the ink system to the rear and confirm the cap surely returns to the original
(When the adhesive tape peels off, the CR unit unintentionally moving.)
position.
2. Push the cap of the Cap Unit to the home position and confirm the cap surely returns to the
original position.
3. Repeat Step 1 to Step 2 a few times. If the action of the cap is too slow or awkward, or does
not return to the original position, replace the ink system with a new one.
1. Select the Adjustment: MENU from the service support mode menu. 1. Perform the Ink Leak Check based on the determination criteria of the INK LEAK CHECK
2. Select "After Unit Repair Operation:MENU" from the Adjustment menu. (p. 278).
3. Execute the “B80 Head Replace Sequence”. C H E C K Pull out the ink leak measurement jig with the Head Replace Sequence is running.
P O IN T
C H E C K Execute the nozzle check after the initial ink charge because the ink leak check is (Power on mode)
P O IN T
performed after this.
1. Perform the adjustment in order from the head angular mecha adjustment. (Refer to Head
Replace Sequence (B80) (p. 348))
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 Right SC Cover A8 Move the Ink Supply Unit on B11 Open Sensor (CL)
B1 (→P. 632) the Main Frame (→P. 636) (→P. 645)
A2 Left SC Cover A9 Right Ink Pack Cover Assy B12 Ink Supply CL Assy
B2 (→P. 632) (→P. 639) (→P. 645)
A3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit A10 IS CL Inner Cover Assy B13 Right Housing
B3 (→P. 633) (→P. 640) (→P. 646)
A4 Front Right Cover A11 Cover Open Sensor (CL) B14 Remove the CR Timing Belt
B4 (→P. 634) (→P. 640) from the CR Motor (→P. 646)
A5 Move the Panel Assy A12 Open Sensor (CL) B15 Remove the USB Host Assy
B5 (→P. 634) (→P. 641) (→P. 647)
A6 Stacker Assy A13 Ink Supply CL Assy B16 Move the CL CRCM Assy
B6 (→P. 635) (→P. 641) (→P. 647)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4 A5 B5
Front Right Cover Move the Panel Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Hook
Panel Unit
Panel Unit
Stacker Assy
6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer. 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.
A7 B7 A8
Rear Housing Assy Move the Ink Supply Unit on the Main Frame
Clamps
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Disengage the hook, then release the ink tubes from the upper supply tube holder.
2. Release the ink tubes from the three clamps.
Move the Ink Supply Unit on the Main Frame Move the Ink Supply Unit on the Main Frame
Clamp
Groove
Clamp
3. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 6. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit. (Y/M/C) from the Ink Supply Unit.
4. Release the ink tube (BK) from the clamp. 7. Remove the clamp.
5. Fix the ink tube (BK) in the groove of the housing. 8. Fix the ink tube (Y/M/C) in the housing.
Move the Ink Supply Unit on the Main Frame Move the Ink Supply Unit on the Main Frame
Ink End
Sensor (Y) Ink End
Sensor (BK)
Ink End
Sensor (M)
Ink End
Sensor (C)
Duct Part
9. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Ink End Sensor. 11.Remove the two screws (S1: ).
10.Pull out the two tubes from the decompression pump unit from the Ink Supply Unit. 12.Remove the Ink Supply Unit while releasing the duct part.
Dowel Cover
Link
Lever
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
13.Place the Ink Supply Unit temporarily. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
A10 A11
IS CL Inner Cover Assy Cover Open Sensor (CL)
Hooks
Cover Open
Sensor (CL)
Hook
A12 A13
Open Sensor (CL) Ink Supply CL Assy
Cable
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Hook (long) Relay Unit Arrow
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
sensor. 2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Open Sensor.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Open Sensor (CL).
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
CR Scale
A14
CR Scale
Full side
Extension Spring
CR Scale
Side view
CR Unit
CR Scale
Hooks
Home side
Hook Slit
The CR Scale is made of SUS and very fragile. Therefore, take extreme care when handling 4. Pull out the CR Scale from the slit of the CR Unit.
one.
If you disassemble the CR Scale, exchange it for the new CR scale.
1. At the full side, disengage the Extension Spring from the hook of the frame.
2. Remove the CR Scale from the hook of frame.
3. At the home side, remove the CR Scale from the hook of the frame.
CR Scale
B8
Right Ink Pack Cover Assy
CR Scale
Dowel Cover
Extension Spring
Link
Lever
Step 1 Step 2
Ink Supply CL
Step 4 to 5 Cover Assy
Hook
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
Follow the procedure below to install the CR Scale. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
1. At the full side, hook the CR Scale on the frame. 2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Hook the Extension Spring on the frame. 3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
3. Route the CR Scale through the slit on the CR unit. then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
4. At the home side, hook the CR Scale on the frame.
5. Check the hook is inserted all the way.
B9 B10
IS CL Inner Cover Assy Cover Open Sensor (CL)
Hooks
Cover Open
Sensor (CL)
Hook
B11 B12
Open Sensor (CL) Ink Supply CL Assy
Cable
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Hook (long) Relay Unit Arrow
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
sensor. 2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Open Sensor.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Open Sensor (CL).
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
B13 B14
Right Housing Remove the CR Timing Belt from the CR Motor
Right Housing
CR Timing Belt
Pinion Gear
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Right Housing. 1. Remove the driven extension spring from the hook on the frame, and loosen the tension on
the CR Timing Belt.
2. Remove the CR Timing Belt from the pinion gear of the CR motor.
B15 B16
Remove the USB Host Assy Move the CL CRCM Assy
CL CRCM Assy
USB Cable
Hook
1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the USB Host Assy. (Do not remove the cable.) 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), and displace the CL CROM Assy.
Route the USB cable through the hook of the Connector Assy. The CR CRCM Assy cannot be removed because the FFC is connected.
CR Motor Assy
B17
CR Motor Assy
Slit
CR Motor Assy
CR Motor Assy
Cable
Relay Connector
Ferrite Core
Clamp
1. Remove the two screws (S25: ). Set the CR Motor Assy so that the slit part faces upside.
2. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
3. Release the ferrite core from the clamp, then remove the CR Motor Assy.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover A11 B11 Cover Open Sensor (BK) A21 B21 Left PG Cam Screw Holder
C1 (→P. 652) C11 (→P. 661) (→P. 669)
C21
A2 B2 Left SC Cover A12 B12 Open Sensor (BK) A22 B22 Move the Left PG Cam to
C2 (→P. 652) C12 (→P. 662) lower side (→P. 669)
C22
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit A13 B13 Ink Supply BK Assy A23 B23 Left PG Torsion Spring
C3 (→P. 653) C13 (→P. 662) (→P. 670)
C23
A4 B4 Move the Panel Assy A14 B14 Left Housing A24 B24 Left Mounting Plate
C4 (→P. 654) C14 (→P. 663) (→P. 670)
C24
A5 B5 Front Right Cover A15 B15 Rear Housing Assy A25 B25 Left PG Cam (with E-ring)
C5 (→P. 655) C15 (→P. 664) (→P. 671)
C25
A6 B6 Stacker Assy A16 B16 Power Supply Unit A26 B26 Right Ink Pack Cover Assy
C6 (→P. 655) C16 (→P. 664) (→P. 671)
C26
A7 B7 Front Housing Assy A17 B17 PF Brush Assy A27 B27 IS CL Inner Cover Assy
C7 (→P. 656) C17 (→P. 665) (→P. 672)
C27
A8 B8 Ink Supply Assy A18 B18 APG Drive Assy A28 B28 Cover Open Sensor (CL)
C8 (→P. 656) C18 (→P. 665) (→P. 672)
C28
A9 B9 Left Ink Pack Cover Assy A19 B19 CR Scale (→P. 651)
a
C9 (→P. 660) C19 (→P. 666)
A10 B10 IS BK Inner Cover Assy A20 B20 Driven Pulley Holder & Driven
C10 (→P. 661) C20 Extension Spring (→P. 668)
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
a (→P. 650)
A29 B29 Open Sensor (CL) A39 B39 Remove the USB Host Assy and CR
C29 (→P. 673) C39 Motor (→P. 678)
A30 B30 Ink Supply CL Assy A40 B40 CR Scale Mounting Plate
C30 (→P. 673) C40 (→P. 678)
A32 B32 Right PG Torsion Spring A42 CR Unit B42 CR Timing Belt
C32 (→P. 674) (→P. 679) (→P. 680)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
C1 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
Panel FFC
FFC Clamps
Panel Unit
Front Cover Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ) 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
There is a place to fasten the grounding wire together when fixing the panel
A5 B5 A6 B6
Front Right Cover Stacker Assy
C5 C6
Stacker Assy
Hook
A7 B7 A8 B8
Front Housing Assy Ink Supply Assy
C7 C8
Connector
FFC
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector.
2. Remove the three screws (S6: ) and the screw (S5: ), then remove the Print Head with
ink tubes.
Clamp
Groove
Ink Tube
Upper Supply Clamp
Hook
Tube Holder
FFC
3. Disengage the hook, then release the ink tubes from the upper supply tube holder. 5. Disconnect the four FFC from Print Head.
4. Release the ink tubes from the three clamps. 6. Release the clamp.
7. Slide the Tube Holder (w/clamp) to direction of the arrow, and remove the Tube Holder (w/
clamp) while releasing the clamp from groove of ink tube joint frame.
Clamp
Groove
Clamp
8. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube 11.Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit. (Y/M/C) from the Ink Supply Unit.
9. Release the ink tube (BK) from the clamp. 12.With the ink tube pass through the clamp, remove the clamp.
10.Fix the ink tube (BK) in the groove of the housing. 13.Fix the ink tube (Y/M/C) in the upper middle housing.
Ink End
Sensor (Y) Ink End
Sensor (BK)
Ink End
Sensor (M)
Ink End
Sensor (C)
Duct Part
14.Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Ink End Sensor. 16.Remove the two screws (S1: ).
15.Pull out the two tubes from the decompression pump unit from the Ink Supply Unit. 17.Remove the Ink Supply Unit while releasing the duct part.
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
18.Remove the Ink Supply Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
Ink Supply Unit cannot be completely removed because the Head FFC is connected to 2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
the Print Head. 3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
Cable
Hole
Hook (long)
Ink Tube (BK)
Clamp
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
sensor. 2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the open sensor (BK).
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the open sensor (BK).
CL CRCM Hook
Board
Hooks
Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks. 1. Release the cable from the hook of the Left Housing.
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board. 2. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Left Housing.
6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
Top
Connector
Clamps
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding 2. Release the cable from the two clamps.
interference with the Duplex Print Assy. 3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it.
PF Brush Assy
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy.
Cable
Full side
Extension Spring
CR Scale
Connector
Hole
Combination
Gear Triangle marks
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. The CR Scale is made of SUS and very fragile. Therefore, take extreme care when handling
one.
• Align the triangle mark on the left APG cam with the triangle mark on the spur gear 14.4 on
If you disassemble the CR Scale, exchange it for the new CR scale.
the APG Drive Assy. At this point, make sure the mark on the combination gear can be seen
through the hole on the APG Drive Assy.
• Insert the pin on the upper paper guide into the groove on the release shaft holder of the APG 1. At the full side, disengage the Extension Spring from the hook of the frame.
Drive Assy. 2. Remove the CR Scale from the hook of frame.
3. At the home side, remove the CR Scale from the hook of the frame.
CR Scale CR Scale
CR Scale
Side view
CR Unit
Extension Spring
CR Scale
Step 1 Step 2
Slit
Step 4 to 5
Hook
4. Pull out the CR Scale from the slit of the CR Unit. Follow the procedure below to install the CR Scale.
1. At the full side, hook the CR Scale on the frame.
2. Hook the Extension Spring on the frame.
3. Route the CR Scale through the slit on the CR unit.
4. At the home side, hook the CR Scale on the frame.
5. Check the hook is inserted all the way.
CR Timing Belt
1. Remove the driven extension spring from the hook on the frame, and loosen the tension on 3. Remove the driven extension holder with the driven extension spring.
the CR Timing Belt.
2. Remove the CR Timing Belt by sliding the driven extension holder in the direction of the
arrow.
Left PG Cam
1. Remove the screw (S21: ), then remove the Left PG Cam Screw Holder with the screw. 1. Slide the left PG cam downward.
1. Remove the Left PG Torsion Spring. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Left Mounting Plate.
Dowel Cover
Left PG Cam
E-ring
Bush
Link
Parallel Pin Lever
PF Scale
Ink Supply CL
Cover Assy
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S9 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
When removing the APG gear, be careful not to touch the PF scale. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
Be careful not to drop the parallel pin. 2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
1. Remove the E-ring and the Bush, then remove the left PG cam and the parallel pin.
then remove the Ink Supply CL Cover Assy.
Hooks
Cover Open
Sensor (CL)
Hook
Cable
CN1
FFC
CL CRCM Board
Hook (long) Relay Unit Arrow
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the ink tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (Y/M/C) from the relay unit.
sensor. 2. Remove the Sensor Cable from one hook.
3. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Open Sensor.
4. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then pull the Ink Supply CL Assy upward to remove it.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Open Sensor (CL).
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
Right Housing
Inside
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Right Housing. 1. Remove the Right PG Torsion Spring.
Parallel Pin
CR Shaft Spring
Mounting Plate
Right APG Cam
Plastic Washer
1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the CR Shaft Spring Mounting Plate. 1. Remove the plastic washer, then remove the Right APG Cam and the parallel pin.
E-ring
Right Scale
Mounting Plate
Plastic Washers
Right PG Cam
1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Right PG Cam. 1. Remove the E-ring and the two plastic washers, then remove the right scale mounting plate.
Right Bearing
Mounting Plate
CR Guide Frame
1. Remove the seven screws (S13: ), then remove the Right Bearing Mounting Plate. 1. Remove the two screws (S23: ), then remove the CR Guide Frame.
E-ring
CR Motor Assy
Shaft
Holes on
Frame the frame
1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the USB Host Assy. 1. Remove the E-ring.
2. Remove the two (S25: ), then remove the CR Motor Assy. 2. Lift the CR Scale Mounting Plate, then remove the CR shaft.
When installing the CR Scale Mounting Plate, set the shaft of the CR Scale Mounting
Plate into the hole of the frame, and fix it with the E-ring.
CR Unit
CR Shaft
1. Pull out the CR shaft from the printer, them remove the CR Unit (with CR Shaft). 1. Pull out the CR shaft from the CR Unit.
B42
CR Timing Belt PW Sensor Cover
C42
CR Unit
PW Sensor Cover
CR Timing Belt
1. Remove the CR Timing Belt from the CR Unit. 1. Remove the screw (S31: ), then remove the PW Sensor Cover.
PW Sensor
C43
FFC
PW Sensor
Connector
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
C3 Feed Sensor
(→P. 685)
A1 B1 C1 B2
Duplex Print Assy Middle Duplex Print Guide
D1 E1 F1 E2
Angle Hole
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Lift the Middle Duplex Print Guide by hooking a finger on the angle hole, and remove it.
2. Remove the Duplex Print Assy.
C2 D2 C3
Left Duplex Print Guide Feed Sensor
F2
Connector
C H E C K When removing the screw in the step below, use a stubby screwdriver whose total 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.
P O IN T
length is 40 mm or shorter. 2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
1. Remove the three screws (S12: ), then remove the Left Duplex Print Guide.
D3
Paper Size Sensor 1st Cassette Assy
E3
Connector
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor. 1. Remove 1st Cassette Assy.
2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
Angle Hole
Hooks
1. Disengage the hooks, then remove the two 1st Pick Up Rollers. 1. Lift the Middle Duplex Print Guide by hooking a finger on the angle hole, and remove it.
Feed Lever
F4
Spring
1. Slide the Feed Lever leftward, then pull it out through the hole of the base.
Make sure to attach the spring as shown above.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 C1 B1
Duplex Print Cover Assy Duplex Print Assy
D1 E1
Dowel
Dowel
1. Remove the two screws (S12: ). 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Duplex Print Cover Assy. 2. Remove the Duplex Print Assy.
B2 C2
Mounting Plate Assy Rear Band
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S12: ), then remove the two Rear Bands.
Cables
1. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Right Duplex Print Guide. 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.
2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
Hooks Connector
Paper Detection
Sensor
Cable
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 Left Ink Pack Cover Assy A9 PF Belt Tension Stopper C11 PF Encoder Assy
C1 D1 (→P. 697) (→P. 701) D11 (→P. 705)
A3 B3 Ink Holder Cover B9 Left Bracket D13 Spur Gear & E-ring
C3 D3 (→P. 698) (→P. 701) (→P. 706)
A4 B4 Cover Open Sensor (BK) B10 Spur Gear & E-ring D14 Left Bracket
C4 D4 (→P. 698) (→P. 702) (→P. 706)
A7 B7 Left SC Cover
C7 D7 (→P. 700)
C8 Left Housing
D8 (→P. 703)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Left Ink Pack Cover Assy IS BK Inner Cover Assy
C1 D1 C2 D2
z
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
A3 B3 A4 B4
Ink Holder Cover Cover Open Sensor (BK)
C3 D3 C4 D4
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover. 1. Remove one screw (S9: ).
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK).
A5 B5 A6 B6
Open Sensor (BK) Ink Supply BK Assy
C5 D5 C6 D6
Cable
Hole
Hook (long)
Ink Tube (BK)
Clamp
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
sensor. 2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the open sensor (BK).
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the open sensor (BK).
CN1
Dent
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks Left SC Cover
Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks. 1. Remove one screw (S1: )
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board. 2. Slide the Left SC Cover while pushing the dent of Left SC Cover, and remove it.
6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
A9 B9
PF Belt Tension Stopper Left Bracket
1. The PF Belt Tension Stopper is in contact with the PF Drive Pulley Holder. Put a mark on 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Left Bracket.
the contact point.
2. Loosen the screw (S22: ) that secures the PF Belt Tension Stopper.
3. Release the leg of the PF Belt Tension Stopper from the frame, then slide the PF Belt
Tension Stopper rearward to remove it.
B10 B12
Spur Gear & E-ring SMAP Drive Sensor
Spur Gear
Sensor Holder
Dowel
E-ring
1. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Spur Gear. 1. While pressing the dowel of the sensor holder, remove the holder in the direction of the
arrow.
Left Housing
C8 D8
Hole
SMAP Drive Sensor
Hook
Cable
Connector
Sensor Holder
Hooks
2. Pull out the SMAP Drive Sensor together with the sensor holder through the cutout of the 1. Release the cable from the hook of the Left Housing.
frame. 2. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Left Housing.
3. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
4. Disengage the four hooks.
1. Remove the screw (S21: ), then remove the Left PG Cam Screw Holder with the screw. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the Anti Static Brush Plate.
Leg
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type
S13 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S22 C.B.S-TITE.P4.SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the FFC from the PF Encoder Assy. 1. The PF Belt Tension Stopper is in contact with the PF Drive Pulley Holder. Put a mark on
2. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the PF Encoder Assy. the contact point.
2. Loosen the screw (S22: ) that secures the PF Belt Tension Stopper.
3. Release the leg of the PF Belt Tension Stopper from the frame, then slide the PF Belt
Tension Stopper rearward to remove it.
Spur Gear
Left Bracket
1. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Spur Gear. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Left Bracket.
PF Timing Belt
D15
1. Press the PF Belt Tension Lever downward to loosen the PF Timing Belt, then release the
belt from the pinion gear of the PF Motor.
2. Remove the PF Timing Belt.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover
C1 D1 (→P. 710)
A2 B2 Left SC Cover
C2 D2 (→P. 710)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
C1 D1 C2 D2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4 A5 B5
Rear Housing Assy Mounting Plate Assy
C4 D4 C5 D5
Top
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding
interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
Top
Clamp
Cable
Cable (CN41)
1. Disconnect the two cables from the connectors. 4. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Rear ASF Unit.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then release the Grounding Wire.
3. Release the cables and the grounding wire from the clamp.
Link Lever
B7
Link Lever
Cable
Link Lever
Shaft
Clamps
Mounting Plate
Hole
Dowel
1. Release the cable from the two clamps. 3. Rotate the Link Lever until its hole aligns with the dowel of the shaft, then remove the Link
2. Remove the screw (S23: ), then slide the Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow. Lever.
Relay Connector
Rear ASF Solenoid
Cable
Rear ASF
Clutch Gear
Tab
Hook
1. Disconnect the cable of the Rear ASF Solenoid from the relay connector. 1. Release the hook, then remove the Rear ASF Clutch Gear disengaging its tooth from the tab
2. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the Rear ASF Solenoid. of the actuator.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
Start
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit C13 PF Brush Assy A13 Spur Gear 36.8
(→P. 719) (→P. 726) B13 (→P. 725)
C3
A4 B4 Rear Housing Assy C14 APG Drive Assy A14 ASF Drive Assy
(→P. 720) (→P. 727) B14 (→P. 725)
C4
A7 B7 IS BK Inner Cover Assy C17 ASF Drive Assy C21 Move the Panel Assy
C7 (→P. 721) (→P. 729) (→P. 731)
A8 B8 Ink Holder Cover C18 Stacker Assy C22 Front Housing Assy
C8 (→P. 722) (→P. 729) (→P. 732)
A9 B9 Cover Open Sensor (BK) C19 1st Cassette Assy C23 Front Left Housing
C9 (→P. 722) (→P. 730) (→P. 732)
A10 B10 Open Sensor (BK) C20 Front Right Cover C24 PF Drive Assy
C10 (→P. 723) (→P. 730) (→P. 733)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
C1 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4 A5 B5
Rear Housing Assy Power Supply Unit
C4 C5
Top
Connector
Clamps
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding 2. Release the cable from the two clamps.
interference with the Duplex Print Assy. 3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it.
A6 B6 A7 B7
Left Ink Pack Cover Assy IS BK Inner Cover Assy
C6 C7
z
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover, Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
A8 B8 A9 B9
Ink Holder Cover Cover Open Sensor (BK)
C8 C9
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover. 1. Remove one screw (S9: ).
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK).
Cable
Hole
Hook (long)
Ink Tube (BK)
Clamp
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following 1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact (BK) from the Ink Supply Unit.
sensor. 2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
1. Disengage the hook by pushing up the open sensor (BK).
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the open sensor (BK).
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks
Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
Hinge Guide Sh
Shaft
4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks. 1. Remove the two Hinge Guides from the Left Ink Pack Cover.
5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
Motor Cable
Hook
Sensor Cable
Connector
Clamp
Relay Connector
1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Spur Gear 36.8. 1. Release the ferrite core from the clamp.
2. Disconnect the motor cable from the relay connector.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable from the connector.
4. Remove the four screws (S23: ), then remove the ASF Drive Assy.
B15
ASF Encoder PF Brush Assy
C13
Cable
PF Brush Assy
Connector
ASF Encoder
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from the connector. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy.
2. Remove the screw (S32: ), then remove the ASF Encoder.
Cable
Connector
Hole
1. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
• Align the triangle mark on the left APG cam with the triangle mark on the spur gear 14.4 on
the APG Drive Assy. At this point, make sure the mark on the combination gear can be seen
through the hole on the APG Drive Assy.
• Insert the pin on the upper paper guide into the groove on the release shaft holder of the APG
Drive Assy.
PW Drive Shutter
Cable
Clamp
Hook
Relay Connector
1. Release the cable of the PW Drive Shutter from the clamp. 1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Spur Gear 36.8.
2. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
3. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the PW Drive Shutter.
Motor Cable
Sensor Cable
Stacker Assy
Connector
Clamp
Relay Connector
1. Release the ferrite core from the clamp. 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.
2. Disconnect the motor cable from the relay connector.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable from the connector.
4. Remove the four screws (S23: ), then remove the ASF Drive Assy.
Hook
Panel FFC
FFC Clamps
Panel Unit
Front Cover Assy
Guide
Grounding
Wire
Grounding
Wire
Panel Unit
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ) 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
There is a place to fasten the grounding wire together when fixing the panel
1. Remove the seven screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Housing Frame Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Left Housing.
PF Drive Assy
PF Drive Assy
C24 Front
PF Drive Pulley
Holder
PF Belt Tension
Stopper Marking
PF Drive Assy
Cable
Clamp
Relay Connector
1. The PF Belt Tension Stopper is in contact with the PF Drive Pulley Holder. Put a mark on 5. Disconnect the cables from the two relay connectors, and release the cables from the clamp.
the contact point. 6. Remove the four screws (S23: ), then remove the PF Drive Assy.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the PF Belt Tension Stopper.
3. Release the leg of the PF Belt Tension Stopper from the frame, then slide it rearward.
4. Remove the PF Timing Belt from the PF Drive Pulley Holder.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover C6 Rear Housing Assy C16 Ink Supply BK Assy (→P.
C1 (→P. 736) (→P. 744) 750)
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit C8 Mounting Plate Assy C18 PF Brush Assy
C3 (→P. 737) (→P. 745) (→P. 751)
A4 B4 Relay Harness Cover C9 Rear ASF Unit C19 APG Drive Assy
C4 (→P. 738) (→P. 746) (→P. 752)
A5 B5 PCB Head Relay Board (with C10 Power Supply Unit C20 APG Motor Assy
C5 Mounting Plate) (→P. 738) (→P. 747) (→P. 753)
A6 Nip Release Solenoid C11 Left Ink Pack Cover C21 Pump Mounting Plate
B6 (→P. 743) Assy (→P. 747) Assy (→P. 754)
B7 Nip Release Sensor C12 IS BK Inner Cover Assy C22 Nip Release Solenoid
(→P. 744) (→P. 748) (→P. 755)
C14 Cover Open Sensor (BK) C24 Front Duplex Paper Guide Assy
(→P. 749) (→P. 756)
A1 B1 A2 B2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
C1 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
Support stand
Right side
Lower SC
Reinforcing Plate
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hooks
Triangle
marks
Hooks
1. Remove one screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
screw (S1: ). Make sure that the extended support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two
3. Remove one screw (S2: ). triangle marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, press the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
hold up the ADF/SCN Unit to disengage the two hooks, then fold the support stand.
A4 B4 A5 B5
Relay Harness Cover PCB Head Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
C4 C5
Relay Cable
Clamp
Relay Cables
Relay Cable
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Release the ADF/SCN Cable (Purple) from the hook of the Relay Harness Cover. 1. Disconnect the five Relay cables from the PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
2. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from the clamp.
3. Release the relay cables (CN401, CN402, CN403) from hook of Relay Harness Cover.
4. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Relay Harness Cover.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
ADF/SCN Cable
Grounding Wire (CN103, CN104)
SCN ground cable
Clamp
Hook Lumiler,
Clamp
Cable Holder
CN8
CN9
CN14
CN16
CN32
CN19
2. Remove the cable of front side (around the cable holder) by the following procedure. 3. Disconnect the cables of rear side(1) by the following procedure.
2-1. Release the two hooks of lumiler, then open the lumiler . 3-1. Disconnect the ADF/SCN cable from the connector (CN103, CN104) of the main
2-2. Release the clamp. board.
2-3. Disconnect the four cables (CN11, CN15, CN16, CN44) from the PCB Mechanism 3-2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the SCN ground cable.
Relay Board. 3-3. Disconnect five relay cables from connector (CN8, CN9, CN14, CN19, CN32) of the
2-4. Release the cable from the Cable Holder. PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
3-4. Release the cable from the two clamps.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
CN47
CN42
CN59
CN7
CN45
CN58
CN10
4. Disconnect the cables of rear side(1) by the following procedure. 5. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with
4-1. Release the cable from three clam Mounting Plate).
4-2. Disconnect the ten cables and a FFC from the following connector of the PCB
mechanism Relay Board.
・CN7 ・CN41 ・CN45 ・CN58
・CN10 ・CN42 ・CN46 ・CN59
・CN18 ・CN43 ・CN47
4-3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Ground cable.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
Ground cable
Clamp 1 Clamp 1
Clamp 2
Clamp 3
Clamp 2
CN47
Clamp 3
CN43
CN46
CN18
CN41 CN7
CN42
CN59
CN45
CN58
CN10
Rotate the cables by the following procedure. 2. Rotate the ground cable to clamp, then fix it by screw (S1).
1. Route the cable to the following specified clamp, then connect the cable to PCB 3. Connect the following cable and FFC to the PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
Mechanism Relay board. FFC (CN7: White)
Cable (CN10: Black):Clamp 3 > Clamp 2 > Clamp 1 Cable (CN42: Black)
Cable (CN58: Yellow):Clamp 2 > Clamp 1 Cable (CN45: White)
Cable (CN59: Yellow):Clamp 2 > Clamp 1 Cable (CN47: Black)
Cable (CN46: Black):Clamp 2 > Clamp 1
Cable (CN41: White):Clamp 1
Cable (CN18: White):Clamp 1
Cable (CN43: Black):Clamp 1
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
Clamp4 Clamp
Clamp2 Clamp5
Clamp3
CN8
CN14
CN9
CN32 CN19
4. Route the cables to the following specified clamp, then connect the cables to the 5. Route the cables to Cable Holder following the above figure, then connect the
PCB Mechanism Relay Board. cables to PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
Cable (CN14: White):Clamp 2 > Clamp 4 Cable (CN11: White):four hooks > Clamp
Cable (CN32: Red):Clamp 4 Cable (CN44: Red):four hooks > Clamp
Cable (CN8: White:Clamp 3 > Clamp 4 Cable (CN15: White:three hooks > Clamp
Cable (CN9: White:Clamp 4 > Clamp 5
Cable (CN19: White:Clamp 4 > Clamp 5
Note the following points when you rotate the cable (CN19).
• Set the positioning of the cable at left side (Home position side) of clamp 4.
• Set the ferrite core of the cable to between clamp5 and ferrite core support.
Nip Release
Grounding Wire Solenoid Wire Saddle
Lumiler
CN16
Nip Release
Plunger Solenoid Hole
6. Route the cable(CN16) following the above figure, then connect the cable to PCB 1. Release the cables from the wire saddle.
Mechanism Relay Board. 2. Remove one screw (S1: ), then release the Grounding Wire.
7. Set the hook of Lumiler to Cable Holder, then fix it. 3. Remove the three screws (S24: ), then remove the Nip Release Solenoid.
8. Connect the five relay cables to PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
Insert the plunger into the hole on the Nip Release Solenoid.
B7
Nip Release Sensor Rear Housing Assy
C6
Top
Cable
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the Nip Release Sensor. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector. 2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), and remove the Rear Housing Assy while avoiding
interference with the Duplex Print Assy.
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy.
2. Remove the Duplex Print Assy.
Top
Clamp
Cable
Cable (CN41)
1. Disconnect the two cables from the connectors. 4. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Rear ASF Unit.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then release the Grounding Wire.
3. Release the cables and the grounding wire from the clamp.
Connector
Clamps
Cable
Cover
Ink Supply BK Dowel
Cover Assy
1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ).
2. Release the cable from the two clamps. 2. Remove the two screws (S9: ).
3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it. 3. Remove the Link Lever from the dowel of the inner cover while expanding the cover,
then remove the Ink Supply BK Cover Assy.
Hooks IS BK Inner
Cover Assy
1. Remove the two screws (S9: ). 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.
2. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the IS BK Inner Cover Assy.
Make sure to set the two hooks when installing the IS BK Inner Cover.
Cable
Cover Open
Sensor (BK)
Hook
Hook (long)
1. Remove one screw (S9: ). The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the Cover Open Sensor (BK). and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
CL CRCM
Board
Hooks
Hole
Clamp Arrow
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Rotate the connection point by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise, and remove the Ink Tube 4. Remove the sensor cable from the two hooks.
(BK) from the Ink Supply Unit. 5. Disconnect the FFCs from the connector of th CL CRCM Board.
2. Release the Ink Tube (BK) from the Clamp. 6. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply BK Assy.
3. Pull out the Ink Tube (BK) through the Hole.
C H E C K The screw to be removed is indicated by an arrow mark.
P O IN T
Hook
PF Brush Assy
1. Release the cable from the hook of the Left Housing. 1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy.
2. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Left Housing.
Cable
Connector
Hole
1. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
• Align the triangle mark on the left APG cam with the triangle mark on the spur gear 14.4 on
the APG Drive Assy. At this point, make sure the mark on the combination gear can be seen
through the hole on the APG Drive Assy.
• Insert the pin on the upper paper guide into the groove on the release shaft holder of the APG
Drive Assy.
Clamp
Connector
Connector
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG Encoder sensor. 4. Remove the two screws (S13: ), then remove the APG Motor Assy.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG motor.
3. Release the cable of the clamp from the APG motor.
Cable
Wire Saddles
Pump Tube
1. Pull out the two pump tubes from the Ink Supply Unit. 3. Release the cable from the clamp.
2. Release the two pump tubes from the wire saddles. 4. Remove the four screws (S13: ), then remove the Pump Mounting Plate Assy.
Nip Release
Grounding Wire Solenoid Wire Saddle
Plunger
Spring
Shaft
Nip Release
Plunger Solenoid Hole
1. Release the cables from the wire saddle. 1. Remove the spring from the plunger.
2. Remove one screw (S1: ), then release the Grounding Wire. 2. Pull out the shaft from the plunger, then remove the Nip Release Lever.
3. Remove the three screws (S24: ), then remove the Nip Release Solenoid.
Insert the plunger into the hole on the Nip Release Solenoid.
Connector
Cable
Hooks
Front Duplex Paper Guide Assy
1. Remove the four screws (S23: ), then remove the Front Duplex Paper Guide Assy from 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the Paper Jam Sensor.
the Pump Mounting Plate Assy. 2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
1st:10 sec 1st:10 sec
1st/2nd Cassette Assy A ---
2nd:10sec 2nd:10sec
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
D3 End Guide
(→P. 761)
A1 B1 B2
1st/2nd Cassette Assy Retard Roller
C1 D1
Lever
Retard Roller
1. Pull out 1st Cassette Assy and 2nd Cassette Assy. 1. Move the lever upward, then remove the Retard Roller.
Paper Label
1. Pull the Paper Label out of the Paper Size Holder. 1. Pull the Paper Size Holder upward to remove it.
End Guide
End Guide
D3
1. Remove the five screw (S20: ). 3. Remove the Paper size sensor lever drive part A and the Paper size sensor lever drive
2. Slide the paper cassette lower frame to arrow direction while holding up it and releasing the part B.
dowel. 4. Remove the end guide gear.
Confirm the following point when installing the paper size sensor drive part A and
paper size sensor drive part B.
Dowel of end guide is inserted to groove of the paper size sensor drive part A.
Align the positioning of paper size sensor lever drive part A and paper size sensor lever drive
part B.
End Guide
End Guide
8
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
<Lubrication Point>
Right PG Adjustment Lever <Lubrication Point>
Right PG Adjustment
Left PG Adjustment Lever
Lever
Left PG Adjustment Lever <Type>
<Type>
G-97
G-97
<Application Amount>
<Application Amount>
Appropriate amount
Appropriate amount
<Remarks>
<Remarks>
Lubricate with brush on the
Lubricate with brush on the
contact surface between Left
contact surface between
PG Adjustment Lever and
Right PG Adjustment Lever
Application point APG Gear.
and CR Bearing.
<Lubrication Point>
Transmission Gear
<Type>
G-96
<Application Amount>
0.1g
<Remarks>
Lubricate with brush on the
entire circumference of
Transmission Gear.
<Lubrication Point>
CR Driven Pulley
<Type>
G-97
<Application Amount>
φ 1 mm × 1 mm
<Remarks>
Lubricate with injector on
the hole on CR Driven
Pulley.
CR Driven Pulley
8.3 USB F/W Update 1-2. Copy firmware data& license data into the folder.
1. USB setup
1-1. Insert USB memory to PC, and create new folder: the name of FWF483TL.
2. Execute firmware update. 2-4. Firmware Update execute screen will be shown.
(Current firmware data version and update data version will be shown)
2-1. Boot up the printer in service support mode.
Push the [#] button and execute firmware update.
(Refer to "5.1.2 Service mode startup and operating procedures" (p.83))
2-2. Select the “USB FW Update”. USB Memory FW Update
Figure 8-9. USB F/W Update procedure (3) 2-5. Firmware update process screen will be shown.
2-3. Insert USB memory and push [#] button when below screen shown. Do not remove USB memory, or power off the printer
during firmware update.
USB Memory FW Update
Now FW Updating...
Please wait.
EPSON PRINTER
Program Update Mode
FINISHED MAIN
ROM VERSION xxxxxxxxxxxxx
ROM1 FIXSUM xxxx
ROM2 FIXSUM xxxx
ROM3 FIXSUM xxxx
9
APPENDIX
Confidential
EPSON WF-C869Ra/WF-C869R Revision E
Item Explanation
Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed. When enabled, the
Sleep timer setting
time period before the product enters sleep mode is also displayed.
Power Off Timer The Power Off Timer setting is displayed.
USB I/F Timeout Setting USB I/F time out settings are displayed.
USB
Printing Language Print language settings are displayed.
Network
Basic settings Auto Error Solver Whether the auto error resolver options are enabled or not is displayed.
Memory Device Whether the external memory setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Memory Device Interface The file sharing setting (which connection way of computers, USB or
File Sharing
network, is allowed to access the external memory) is displayed.
Ink Drying Time The Ink Drying Time when duplex printing is displayed.
PC connection via USB Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
NFC Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper Size
Paper cassette 1 to
Paper Type
Paper cassette 4 Paper size and type settings of each of the cassettes and whether the auto
Paper cassette Paper Size Auto Detect
paper size detection feature is enabled or not are displayed.
Paper Size
MP tray
Paper Type
A4/Letter Auto Switching Whether the auto switching function is enabled or not is displayed.
Item Explanation
Top Offset
Left Offset
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Top Offset in Back
Print settings Universal Print Settings
Left Offset in Back
Check Paper Width Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Skip Blank Page Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper Size Paper size setting is displayed.
Paper Type Paper type setting is displayed.
Orientation The orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Quality The print quality setting (Draft, Standard, or Best) is displayed.
Ink Save Mode Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Common settings>
Print Order The print order setting (print from the first page or last page) is displayed.
Number of Copies Standard number of copies (1 to 999) is displayed.
Binding Margin The Binding Margin is displayed.
Auto Paper Ejection Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
2-Sided Printing Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Font Source
Font Number
Pitch
PDL Print Configuration
Height
<PCL Menu> Symbol Set The Setting of PCL Menu is displayed.
Form
CR Function
LF Function
Paper Source Assign
Error Sheet Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Coloration The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
<PS3 Menu>
Binary Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
PDF Page Size The PDF paper size setting is displayed.
PCL
<Language Version> PS The version of each of the printer language is displayed.
PDF
Item Explanation
Subject (“Scan to Email” only) The subject of email is displayed.
Color The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
File Format File format setting is displayed.
Document Open Password (not provided for “Scan to
Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Cloud”)
Permissions password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printing Whether printing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Editing Whether editing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Resolution (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Scan resolution setting is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the 2-sided scanning is enabled or not is displayed.
Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of one-side scanning)) is
Binding Position
displayed.
Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
Remove shadow Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Scan to Email>
The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
<Scan to Network Folder/FTP> Surround
Scan settings setting is disabled)) is displayed.
<Scan to Memory Device>
<Scan to Cloud> The center width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Center
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Remove Punch Holes Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
The erasing setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/--- (in case of
Erasing Position
the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing amount (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch holes
Erase Amount
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Orientation (Original) The document orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Document Type The quality setting (Text/Text & Image/Photo) is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
Filename Prefix (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
Date Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Time of Day Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Compression Ratio (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) The Compression Ratio is displayed.
Attached File Max Size (“Scan to Email” only) The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
Item Explanation
Lock Setting Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Admin Settings
Access Control Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Version The version is displayed.
Epson Open Platform Information
Product key The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).
Optional Cassette Information Cassette 2 Firmware Version The version of the firmware of cassette 2 is displayed.
Item Explanation
B&W Copy
Color Copy
B&W Fax
Color Fax
B&W Scan The total number of printed pages for each of the
<Sorted by Usage>
Color Scan purposes is displayed.
B&W Print from Computer or Mobile Device
Number of prints
Color Print from Computer or Mobile Device
B&W Print from Memory Device or Other Functions
Color Print from Memory Device or Other Functions
ESC/P-R
PCL The version of each of the printer language is
<Sorted by Printer Language>
PS and PDF displayed.
Others
Item Explanation
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS Server
Network Settings Secondary DNS Server The network settings are displayed.
DNS Domain Name
Proxy Server Settings
Proxy Server
Proxy Server Port Number
Subject (“Scan to Email” only) The subject of email is displayed.
Color Mode The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
File Format (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) File format setting is displayed.
Document Open Password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Permissions Password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printing Whether printing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Editing Whether editing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Resolution (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Scan resolution setting is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the 2-sided scanning is enabled or not is displayed.
Binding Position Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of one-side scanning)) is displayed.
Scan Area (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Original document size setting is displayed.
<Scan to Email>
<Scan to Network Folder/FTP> Remove Shadow (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Scan settings
<Scan to Memory Device> The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove setting
Surround
<Scan to Cloud> is disabled)) is displayed.
The center width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Center
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Remove Punch Holes Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
The erasing setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/--- (in case of
Erasing Setting
the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing amount (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch holes
Erase Amount
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Orientation (original) The document orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Document Type The quality setting (Text/Text & Image/Photo) is displayed.
Mixed Size Original The setting of Mixed Size Original is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
Item Explanation
Remove Background ---
File Name Prefix (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) ---
<Scan to Email> Date Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Scan to Network Folder/FTP>
Scan settings Time Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Scan to Memory Device>
<Scan to Cloud> Continuous Scan (ADF) ---
Compression Ratio (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) The data compression ratio setting (Low/Middle/High) is displayed.
Attached file Max Size (“Scan to Email” only) The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
Epson Open Platform Information Product key The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).
Fax Function Whether the fax feature is enabled or not is displayed.
Large-Capacity Paper Feed Serial Number
Unit FW version
Serial Number
Intermediate Unit
FW version
Serial Number
Option Settings Optional Cassette 1
FW version Firmware version of each of the option cassettes are displayed.
Serial Number
Optional Cassette 2
FW version
Serial Number
Optional Cassette 3
FW version
Finisher Function
Part number
Black
Serial Number
Part number
Cyan
Serial Number Model number and manufacturer's serial number of each of the ink cartridges
Ink Cartridges
Supply Status Part number is displayed.
Magenta
Serial Number
Part number
Yellow
Serial Number
Maintenance Box Part number The model number of the Maintenance Box is displayed.
Item Explanation
Part number Model number of each of the feed rollers is displayed.
maintenance roller 1 to Number of Sheets Loaded The number of sheets fed by each of the maintenance rollers is displayed.
maintenance roller 4 The number of replacements (the number of times the counter is reset) of
Number of Replacements
each of the paper feed rollers is displayed.
Number of Sheets Loaded
Rear Paper Feed
Number of Replacements
Number of Sheets Loaded
Mist / VOC Filter Number of Replacements
Part number
Number of Sheets Loaded
Periodic replacement parts Belt unit Number of Replacements
Supply Status Part number
Number of Sheets Loaded ---
Belt cleaner Number of Replacements
Part number
Number of Sheets Loaded
ADF feed roller Number of Replacements
Part number
Number of Sheets Loaded
High capacity input unit Number of Replacements
Part number
Print head serial ID ID of the print head is displayed.
Hind head sensor degration ---
Item Explanation
First Time Printing The data and time the printer printed for the first time are displayed.
Total Number of Pages The total number of pages printed by the printer is displayed.
<Sorted by Function> Total Number of B&W Pages The total number of pages printed in monochrome is displayed.
Total Number of Color Pages The total number of pages printed in color is displayed.
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A5
<Sorted by Paper Size> A6 The total number of printed pages per paper size is displayed. Detailed count
(1-sided/2-sided, B&W/ per function (one-sided/2-sided, monochrome/color) is also displayed for
Color) B4/Legal each paper size.
B5
Envelope
Usage History Other
B&W Print from Computer or
Mobile Device
Color Print from Computer or
Mobile Device
B&W Copy
Color Copy
<Sorted by Usage> The total number of printed pages for each of the purposes is displayed.
B&W Fax
Color Fax
B&W Print from Memory
Device or Other Functions
Color Print from Memory
Device or Other Functions
Item Explanation
Plain papers
Letterhead
Recycled
Color
Preprinted
High quality plain paper
Thick-Paper 1 The total number of pages printed on each of the paper types is displayed.
<Paper Type> Thick-Paper 2 notes: Count in number of sheet. Including paper jam.The number does not
Thick-Paper 3 meet with the other count.
Matte
Ultra Glossy
Usage History Prem. Glossy
Prem. semigloss
Glossy
Envelope
The Cumulative number of
Other The total number of times a paper jam error occurs is displayed.
paper jam
Document Table (Number of
pages) The total number of pages scanned on the scanner glass or in the ADF is
Number of Sheets displayed.
Scanned ADF (Number of pages)
ADF (Number of Fed Sheets) The total number of document sheets fed by the ADF is displayed.
Cassette 1 to Cassette 4, Rear
Number of Sheets Loaded The total number of printed pages per paper source is displayed.
Paper Feed, Paper Feed Slot
Item Explanation
Code
Adjustment name and execution date and time of last five adjustments
User Adjustment Name
executed by the user are displayed.
Timer of day
Code
Cleaning type and execution date and time of last five cleaning operations are
Cleaning History Type
displayed.
Timer of day
Nozzles Clogging State Rank A number that represents the level of nozzle clogging is displayed.
Printer Error For each of the errors, the following information is displayed
Paper Jam Error - Error Code
- Sub Code
- Date of Occurrence
Setting Change History - Number of Pages
Fatal Error When Printing - Internal Temperature
- Internal Humidity
- Paper Path
Error History Scanner Error For each of the errors, the following information is displayed
- Error Code
Fatal Error When Scanning - Date of Occurrence
- Number of Scan Pages
Fax Error
Network Error For each of the errors, the following information is displayed
- Error Code
System Error - Date of Occurrence
Other Error
Ink coverage of print jobs finished before printing this status sheet is
PD1 Level displayed according to the rule below.
Coverage Coverage Raito L: less than 5%, M: 5% to 20%, H: more than 20%
Ink coverage of the last print job is displayed according to the rule below.
PD2 Level
L: less than 20%, M: 5% to 50%, H: more than 50%
Printer Error
Scanner Error
Status Fax Error ---
Network Error
Other Error